Toshiba Rd Xs55Ku Operation Manual XS55SU_Ope_E_p002 011
2014-12-13
: Toshiba Toshiba-Rd-Xs55Ku-Operation-Manual-129049 toshiba-rd-xs55ku-operation-manual-129049 toshiba pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 199
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
RD-XS55KU Playback OWNER’S MANUAL Recording HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER Introduction TOSHIBA HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER RD-XS55KU DIGITAL VIDEO Editing Library OPERATIONS GUIDE Read “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first. Network Navi IMPORTANT NOTE Before connecting, operating, or adjusting this product, carefully read the Important Safety, Installation, Care, and Service Information in the INSTALLATION GUIDE. Function setup Others Printed in China Printed on 70% Recycled Paper RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p001-200 1 H P000458240 PM0026072010 06.3.20, 2:04 PM © 2006 Toshiba Corporation Introduction Table of contents Introduction Playback Caution for safety ................................................ 4 About this product .............................................. 5 Choosing a disc .................................................. 6 Index to parts and controls .............................. 12 Front panel ............................................................... 12 Rear panel ............................................................... 14 Remote control ........................................................ 16 Display ..................................................................... 18 Before operating this recorder ........................ 20 Using TV Guide On Screen® ............................. 23 Services and options ............................................... 24 Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU .. 29 Recording Before recording ............................................... 32 Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical format) .... 34 DVD-RAM physical format ....................................... 35 Entering characters .................................................. 36 Selecting a disc according to purposes of use (DVD-RAM/R/RW) ............................................. 38 Setting for recording on a DVD-R/RW disc in Video mode .............................................................. 39 Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen® ........................................ 40 With recording frequency selection only .................. 40 Changing the recording options ............................... 41 Setting recording by specifying details manually ..... 43 Setting recording (For satellite box users) ............... 43 Recording a TV program ................................... 45 Recording an external source .......................... 49 DV recording (Recording from a digital video camera) .............................................................. 52 Deleting recorded contents .............................. 55 To delete a title (chapter) ......................................... 55 Deleting multiple specified parts .............................. 55 Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) ............................................. 60 Playing at various speeds ........................................ 62 Playing a DVD video disc ................................. 66 Locating a title using the top menu .......................... 66 Other playback functions ................................. 68 Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later (Pause TV) ............................................................... 68 Playing a TV program currently being recorded (Chase Play) ............................................................ 69 Zooming a picture .................................................... 70 Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window (P in P playback) ...................................................... 70 Locating by entering the number of a desired section ..................................................................... 71 Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time (Time Search) .................................................. 71 Selecting the sound ................................................. 72 Viewing JPEG files ................................................... 74 Playing MP3/WMA files ............................................ 76 Checking the current status and settings ................. 78 Functions in Quick Menu ......................................... 80 Editing Creating your own title ..................................... 84 Editing procedure ..................................................... 84 Basic flow ................................................................. 85 1: Changing a name of a recorded title .................... 86 2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters ..... 87 3: Collecting necessary scenes ............................... 92 4: Dubbing to save ................................................... 97 Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW ....... 112 DVD-Video finalizing process ........................ 122 Other editing functions ................................... 126 Changing the picture on CONTENT MENU ........... 126 Combining two titles (Original) into one ................. 128 Others ................................................................. 56 To protect recorded content ..................................... 56 Relay recording ........................................................ 56 Technical Information ............................................... 56 2 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 2 06.3.22, 3:18 PM Searching for a desired title ........................... 133 Changing the listing order ...................................... 133 Searching ............................................................... 133 Jumping ................................................................. 134 Checking remaining space ............................. 139 Viewing a number and space of a disc .................. 139 Viewing remaining space ....................................... 139 Others Before calling service personnel ................... 190 Output sound conversion table ..................... 192 Error codes on the display window ............... 193 Recording duration ......................................... 194 Language code list .......................................... 195 Specification .................................................... 196 Network Navi features ..................................... 154 Displaying thumbnails (Title List) .................. 155 Function setup Operating with the remote control screen .... 157 Net Keyboard ......................................................... 158 Operation using the Virtual Remote Control .......... 159 Network Navi Preparation for Network Navi ......................... 145 1: Connection to a PC ............................................ 145 2: Recorder's setup-Network setting ...................... 147 3: Setting up the PC ............................................... 151 4: Starting Network Navi ........................................ 152 5: Network Navi settings ........................................ 153 Customizing the function settings ................ 172 DVD player settings ................................................ 176 Picture/Audio settings ............................................ 179 Display settings ...................................................... 181 Operational settings ............................................... 182 DVD recorder operation ......................................... 183 Management settings ............................................ 186 Initial settings ......................................................... 187 Library What is Network Navi? ................................... 142 Main features of Network Navi ............................... 142 Flow of Network Navi setting ................................. 142 Operating environment .......................................... 143 Terminology and trademarks ................................. 143 Restrictions and disclaimer .................................... 143 Function setup Editing Network Navi If you are having a difficulty with Network Navi features .................................................... 170 Playback Viewing Library data ....................................... 135 Viewing title information ......................................... 135 Viewing disc information ........................................ 135 Maintenance of Library data .................................. 136 Setting a timer recording by directly specifying the date, time, and channel .................................... 168 Useful features of timer recording setting using email ...................................................................... 169 Recording Using Library data ........................................... 132 Basic operation of the Library system .................... 132 Introduction Setting a timer recording using email ........... 168 Library Using Library information (Library) ............... 160 Setting for custom menu addition (Custom Menu Editor) ..................................... 161 Net Dubbing ..................................................... 163 Dubbing to a device on the same network ............. 163 Others Net Monitor ...................................................... 165 3 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 3 06.3.22, 3:18 PM Introduction Caution for safety Read “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, “Precautions” and all other sections of the “INSTALLATION GUIDE” that came with this product prior to reading this “OPERATIONS GUIDE”. 4 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 4 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction About this product “ ” may appear on the TV screen during operation. “ ” means that the operation is not permitted by the recorder or the disc. Recording Restrictions and Copyright Copy-protected contents of DVD-Video discs, VIDEO CDs or audio CDs on the market cannot be copied on this recorder. Contents without copy protection should be copied or edited only in accordance with applicable copyright laws, which may restrict copying or editing. Contents that permit single copying (copy once contents) can be recorded onto DVD-RAM discs, with some dubbing and editing restrictions. DVD-R/RW discs cannot record these contents. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of copyrighted materials including, without limitation, television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Editing Library Compatibility Network Navi In isolated cases, a disc bearing the DVD or CD logo may not fully and properly play back all features or as intended by the creator of the disc. This can be due, among other reasons, to problems and errors that can occur during the creation or recording of DVD and other software and the manufacture of software discs (including blank discs). Moreover, because of variations in the quality of discs, this recorder may not be able to record on all discs that bear a DVD-RAM, DVD-RW or DVD-R logo, but you should not encounter difficulty if you use only high quality recordable DVD discs. Additionally, discs recorded in this device may not operate properly in other DVD players, recorders and/or personal computer drives. If you happen to encounter difficulties playing or recording a DVD disc or playing a CD disc, please feel free to call our Customer Service Hotline at 1-800-319-6684. Function setup Like any HDD, the HDD in the DVD recorder is a fragile device that is susceptible to partial or complete failure if it is jarred or as a result of use over time. It will not last forever. Therefore, do not use the HDD for longer term storage of programs you wish to retain. [If portions of the HDD become damaged, programs recorded on those portions may exhibit pixelization or block noise when played back. Repeated playback of the program may cause the problem to get worse and, eventually, the program may become unplayable. Accordingly, if you notice such noise in a program that you want to save, you should transfer to a recordable DVD disc as soon as possible.] Recordable DVD discs are also susceptible to damage if not handled and stored carefully and some or all of the programs on them may become unplayable. You can reduce these risks by using high quality DVD recordable discs and checking their playability from time to time. If it becomes necessary to service your DVD recorder, it may be necessary to delete some or all of the programs on the HDD. This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions for this recorder. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner that allows specific or limited operation during playback. As such, the recorder may not respond to all operating commands. This is not a defect in the recorder. Please refer to the notes on compatible discs later in this Introduction and to the discussion of DVD playback and features later in this manual. Playback About the hard disc drive (HDD) Playback Restrictions Recording Because of its recording capability and hard disc drive (HDD), this DVD recorder operates more like a computer and differently than a standard DVD player. In addition to containing a microprocessor, it contains a HDD, an operating system, random access memory (RAM), and a DVD-RAM/RW/R drive. The operating system includes software stored on the HDD that is transferred to the RAM when the machine is turned on and at other times during operation. This transfer can take time. Therefore, when you turn the DVD recorder on, it may take a little while before it is ready to use. Likewise, other functions may not be performed as quickly as they would on other AV equipment. Additionally, because programs stored on the DVD-RAM/RW/R drive cannot be accessed as quickly as those stored on the HDD, accessing those programs (or deleting a program from a DVD-RAM disc) may take more time. Please take these factors into consideration as you use the DVD recorder. Introduction Some differences Others 5 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 5 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Choosing a disc When you want to play DVD or CD software or copy programs from the HDD to a recordable DVD, load an appropriate disc into the recorder. There are many types and formats of discs. Please use the following information to select an appropriate disc. Notes • Handle the disc according to the disc instruction manual. • Because of problems and errors that can occur during the creation of DVD and CD software and/or the manufacture of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that this HDD/DVD Video Recorder will successfully play every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos. Additionally, Toshiba cannot assure that discs recorded in this HDD/DVD Video Recorder will successfully play in other DVD players, recorders and/or personal computer drives. If you happen to experience any difficulty playing a DVD and/or CD disc on this HDD/DVD Video Recorder, please contact Toshiba Customer Service. For recording / playback Disc Mark DVD-RAM Specification Remarks • Single sided 4.7GB (12cm (43/4 in.)) • Double sided 9.4GB (12cm (43/4 in.)) Read carefully the section “On DVD-RAM discs” ( page 8). Select a DVD-RAM disc that shows a statement on its package such as “this disc can be used with video recorders and drives compatible with 4.7GB DVD-RAM discs” or “this disc can copy images that permit single copying.” DVD-R • 4.7GB For General Ver.2.0/2.1 (12cm (43/4 in.)) Read carefully the section “On DVD-R discs” ( page 9). Depending on the disc status or the recording equipment, playback of the disc may not be possible on this recorder. DVD-RW • Ver. 1.1 or later (12cm (43/4 in.)) Read carefully the section “On DVD-RW discs” ( page 9). Depending on the disc status or the recording equipment, playback of the disc may not be possible on this recorder. Using different disc types for different purposes DVD-RAM discs for your personal library DVD-RAM discs comply with the global standard DVD-VR (Video Recording) format, and are optimized for recording of TV programs. You can rewrite repeatedly without deterioration of an image quality, erase unnecessary parts, divide a chapter, or specify playback area by frame. Its cartridge is suitable for a longer-term storage and family use, and its large capacity of 9.4 GB allows more recording space. DVD-R/RW discs when creating your own original discs for distribution DVD-R discs are designed to comply with the global standard DVD-Video format, and can be recorded only once. DVDR discs are convenient when you edit your original content (recorded personal events such as a wedding party) with this recorder, transfer them to the recorder and make copies to send to your friends or relatives. The discs can be played on other compatible DVD players. DVD-RW discs, which are rewriteable, can be used as well. * DVD-R and DVD-RW may not be the best suited format for recording TV programs. Because of the way the discs are formatted, it may not be possible to edit or divide the program as you may prefer, to record secondary languages, or programs that are copy protected in a way that allows only one copy. (NOTE: “Copy once” protected programs generally can be recorded to DVD-RAM discs.) * This recorder records on a DVD-R/RW disc in DVD-Video format only. * On DVD-R/RW discs, direct recording, copying or the method “Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW” ( page 112) are available. 6 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 6 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction For playback only Disc Mark DVD video disc Remarks • 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.) Region number The region number of this DVD recorder is 1. If region numbers, corresponding to a specific playable area, are printed on your DVD video disc and you do not find 1 or ALL , or the disc is encoded to permit playback only in regions other than Region 1, disc playback will not be allowed by the recorder. 1 or ALL • Color system: NTSC DIGITAL VIDEO Playback VIDEO CD Recording Specification • 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.) • Color system: NTSC • Version 1.1 and 2.0 • 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.) CD-R • 12cm (43/4 in.) • CD-DA (audio CD) format Editing Audio CD Depending on the disc status, playback may not be possible. CD-RW Library Network Navi • You cannot play discs other than those listed above. • You cannot play non-standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above. • You cannot play discs with specialized encoding (such as SACD discs) or the DVD audio portions of DVD Audio discs. • This recorder uses the NTSC color system, and cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other color system (PAL, SECAM, etc.), even if they have region marks 1 or ALL . • Toshiba cannot guarantee that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected. Please see the discussion of compatibility on page 5. Function setup • Toshiba is not liable for any damage or loss caused directly or indirectly by the malfunction of this recorder, including, without limitation, any one of the following: • Failure to record contents intended to be recorded by the consumer. • Failure to edit contents as intended by the consumer. • When a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc created on this recorder is used (e.g., insertion, playback, recording or editing) in another DVD player, recorder or personal computer drive. • When a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc that is used in the manner described in the immediately preceding bullet point is used again in this recorder. • When a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc that was recorded in another DVD recorder, or in a personal computer drive is used in this recorder. • Some functions such as Library may not work with personal computer discs. • Discs recorded in this recorder may not operate as expected on other DVD players, recorders or personal computer drives. Others is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. 7 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 7 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Choosing a disc (Continued) On DVD-RAM discs Use only DVD-RAM discs that comply with DVDRAM standard Version 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2. The recorder cannot record on a disc formatted in any other standard. When using such a disc, initialize it by using the disc-format function of this recorder. The recorder may not record, dub, or edit some DVDRAM discs, because they are edited/recorded with another manufacturer’s equipment or PC, contain a large number of titles, or have little remaining capacity. Also, a DVD-RAM disc may not be edited or recorded if its title contains still pictures. DVD-RAM discs formatted in UDF2.0 on a PC are not compatible with this recorder. Before using these discs, initialize them on this recorder. This recorder complies with current copyright protection technology and can copy a disc only when the disc permits copying once. When there is no indication on the disc, copying will not be allowed. Such an indication on a disc is required also for the Library Management database. DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are recommended for recording. To protect recorded contents Slide the write-protect tab to “PROTECT” with something small enough. The disc can play, but cannot be edited or erased. Refer to the instructions that come with the disc. When using a disc without a cartridge (commercially available discs) Discs without cartridges can easily attract fingerprints and dust, which is the reason they are not recommended. If you cannot avoid using them, handle with proper care. When you write in a title column on a disc, use a pen with a soft tip. Do not use a pen with a hard tip, such as a ballpoint pen. Recommended discs The following discs have been tested with this recorder: 9.4 GB double-sided cartridge: Panasonic 2X, 3X, 5X 4.7 GB single-sided cartridge: Panasonic 2X, 3X, 5X Two types of DVD-RAM discs are available: ones with cartridges and ones without cartridges. You can use either of them with this recorder, but the former ones are recommended. In order to record highly detailed data, make sure the disc is clean. DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are easier to handle in this regard. Do not open the cartridge shutter. The disc may not play, or may not be recorded or edited once it becomes dirty. There are two types of DVD-RAM cartridges; removable (TYPE 2/4) and not removable (TYPE 1). It is recommended you do not remove the disc even when you can. Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the disc if it is absolutely necessary to remove the disc. Some commercially available cartridge discs cannot be recorded or edited once the inside discs are removed. 8 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 8 PROTECT 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction On DVD-R discs Marks on DVD video discs The following are examples of marks and the meanings. Standards Mark Number of audio streams recorded in the disc. (2 streams such as English and Japanese in this example.) 2 Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted (copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded. Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this recorder can only be used to record copy-free material. DVD-VR mode recording is not possible. Recommended discs That’s (Taiyo-Yuden) 4X, 8X Maxell 4X, 8X 4:3 On DVD-RW discs 16:9 LB Pictures are recorded in the letter box picture shape (4:3 aspect ratio with horizontal black bars in the top and bottom of pictures). Pictures are recorded in the 16:9 wide picture shape. TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will display them in the letter box style. Network Navi Discs labeled DVD-RW Ver.1.1 or 1.2 can be used. Discs compatible with the following recording speeds can also be used: Ver. 1.1/2X Ver. 1.2/4X Ver. 1.2/6X Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120 min.” etc. LB Pictures are recorded in the standard picture shape (4:3 aspect ratio). Library Standards Number of camera angles recorded in the disc. (3 camera angles are recorded in this example.) Editing 3 Number of subtitle languages recorded in the disc. (2 subtitle languages are recorded in this example.) Playback 2 Recording conditions Meanings Recording DVD-R for General Ver.2.0 discs can be used for recording and playback. Discs compatible with the following recording speeds can also be used: Ver. 2.0/2X Ver. 2.0/4X Ver. 2.0 or 2.1/8X Ver. 2.0 or 2.1/16X Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120 min.” etc. Recording conditions Recommended discs* JVC 2X, 4X Pictures are recorded in the 16:9 wide picture shape. TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will display them in the pan scan style (one or both sides of pictures are cut). Actual picture shape may vary depending on the aspect ratio or mode selection of the TV. Others *Operation has been confirmed with recommended discs and tested disc, but some other discs may not be usable. 16:9 PS Function setup Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted (copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded. Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this recorder can only be used to record copy-free material. DVD-VR mode recording is not possible. 9 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 9 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Choosing a disc (Continued) Structure of disc contents On handling discs Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the titles are subdivided into chapters. VIDEO CDs/audio CDs are divided into tracks. Do not touch the playback side of the disc. DVD video disc Title 1 Title 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Yes Playback side Do not stick paper or tape to discs. VIDEO CD / audio CD Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Divided contents of a DVD video disc. Roughly corresponds to a story title in short stories. Chapter: Divided contents of a title. This corresponds to a chapter in a story. Track: Divided contents of a VIDEO CD or an audio CD. No Title: On cleaning discs Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean. Each title, chapter, or track is assigned a number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number”, or “track number” respectively. Some discs may not have these numbers. Yes When you record on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, one recording will always equal one title. You can divide a title into several chapters by marking borders in it to facilitate scene search. Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner, benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc. No On storing discs Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight or near heat sources. Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier. Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing objects on discs outside of their case may cause warping. 10 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 10 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Discs and purposes The table shows main functions which are available on this recorder per disc category. This will help you choose discs. DVD-R disc Suitable for repeat use of the disc, and data storage for video library. Copy once contents can be recorded using a compatible disc. Suitable for saving data in DVD-Video format to play on compatible devices. Suitable for saving data in DVD-Video format to play on compatible devices. You can erase recorded contents to use the disc repeatedly. Once you execute DVDVideo finalizing process on a recorded disc so that it can be played on other players, you cannot make additions, corrections and deletions of contents on the disc. Playback For the first use DVD-RW disc Recording Characteristics on this recorder DVD-RAM disc No preparatory steps required, however initializing is recommended. Initialize the disc. No preparatory steps required. Erasing recorded contents Yes Yes If the disc has been executed DVD-Video finalizing process, first cancel the process then delete contents. Yes Deleting contents cannot restore the disc space. After you execute DVD-Video finalizing process on a recorded disc, you cannot delete contents of the disc. Recording additional content on a recorded disc Yes Yes If the disc has been executed DVD-Video finalizing process, first cancel the process then delete contents. Yes After you execute DVD-Video finalizing process on a recorded disc, you cannot add contents to the disc. Yes Yes Yes Yes After you execute DVD-Video finalizing process on a recorded disc, you cannot name a title or create a thumbnail. Yes Yes After you execute DVD-Video finalizing process on a recorded disc, you cannot name a title or create a thumbnail. Yes No No Yes No No Indexing recorded contents Naming a title Creating a thumbnail Collecting favorite scenes (Playlist Editing) Making a new title from a Playlist containing favorite scenes (Copy within the same disc) Playing contents recorded on this recorder, on other devices When a message appears and Initialize the disc. If it is still unusable, try to the loaded disc cannot be execute DVD-RAM physical used: Format. Execute DVD-Video finalizing process on this recorder. This process makes the disc playable on other compatible devices. (Some models excepted.) Initialize the disc. Execute DVD-Video finalizing process on this recorder. This process makes the disc playable on other compatible devices. (Some models excepted.) Others Contents can be played on any devices compatible with DVD-RAM discs. Follow the instruction of the device to play. Function setup Yes – 11 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011 11 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Yes Library Yes Editing Recording a TV program Introduction Index to parts and controls See pages with arrows for details. Front panel All operations can be possible from the supplied remote control. 4 2 1 20 3 5 6 7 9 8 17 15 13 11 18 16 14 12 10 19 * The above illustration displays the front panel with the cover open. See the following page on how to open or close the cover. q ON/STANDBY button / ON/STANDBY indicator page 20 Turns the power on/restores the unit in the standby mode. u Disc tray page 20 Loads a disc into the disc drive. i (OPEN/CLOSE) button page 20 Opens and closes the disc tray. w HDD button/HDD indicator page 45, 50 Press this to operate the HDD. o Front panel display e DVD button/DVD indicator page 45, 66 Press this to operate a disc inside the disc tray. !0 Remote sensor GUIDE” page 18 in “INSTALLATION r TV Guide button page 23, 40 Starts/exits TV Guide On Screen®. !1 (REC) button Starts recording. page 46 t !2 (SKIP) button Skips to the next chapter or track. /Enter button : Moves highlight or changes value. • Enter: Makes a selection or executes an action. / • / / / / / y HDMI indicator Illuminates while the HDMI connection is verified. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. !3 !4 !5 page 18 (PAUSE) button Stops playback or recording momentarily. 47, 61 (SKIP) button Skips to the previous chapter or track. (PLAY) button Starts playback. page 66 page 20, 45 !6 CH buttons Selects the channel. 12 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 12 page 62 06.3.20, 4:16 PM page page 62 Introduction Recording Playback Editing !7 (STOP) button page 50, 61 Stops playback or recording. To open or close the cover on the front panel Put your finger on the left edge of the cover and pull it down to open. page 52 @0 DV IN terminal Use this when recording from a digital video device such as a digital video camera. Network Navi page 49 !9 INPUT2 jacks Use this when recording from other input source such as a VCR or a camcorder. Library !8 TIME SLIP button/TIMESLIP indicator page 68, 69 Selects the time slip mode. Illuminates in the time slip mode. Note • Do not place a heavy object on the cover while it is open. Doing so may damage the recorder. Function setup Others 13 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 13 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Index to parts and controls (Continued) Rear panel 1 2 3 11 q AC IN socket GUIDE” 10 page 21 in “INSTALLATION w Ventilation fan Do not block the ventilating holes. e DIGITAL AUDIO OUT BITSTREAM/PCM page 29 in “INSTALLATION OPTICAL jack GUIDE” Use this to connect the recorder to an audio receiver equipped with an optical digital audio input jack. page 28 in r COMPONENT OUTPUT jacks “INSTALLATION GUIDE” Outputs video signals to a connected TV or monitor. Connects to a TV or monitor equipped with component video jacks. 4 9 5 14 7 8 t HDMI OUTPUT jack page 26 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE” Use this to connect the recorder to a HDMI compatible TV or monitor. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. y VHF/UHF RF IN (FROM ANT.) input socket page 20 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE” Connects to an antenna or cable signal. u VHF/UHF RF OUT (TO TV) output socket page 20 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE” Connects the supplied coaxial cable to a TV. page 49 i INPUT1/INPUT3 jacks Use this to connect the recorder to output jacks of external devices such as another player or camcorder. 14 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 6 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording Playback Editing o OUTPUT jacks page 21, 23, 24, 28 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE” Outputs video and audio signals to a connected TV or amplifier. Library page 25 in “INSTALLATION !0 G-LINK jack GUIDE” Connect the supplied G-LINK® cable to this jack if you are connecting this recorder to a cable/ satellite box. If you use a cable box connected to this recorder, the TV Guide On Screen® system changes channels on your cable box via the G-LINK® cable to download free program listings for your area while the recorder is turned off. You are also able to control your cable box using the recorder’s remote control after you connect the G-LINK® cable and go through the TV Guide On Screen® setup. (TV Guide On Screen® system is for cable box users only. Not available for satellite box users.) Network Navi Function setup !1 LAN(10/100) port For an optional connection to operate the recorder via a PC. page 142, 145, 146) for See “Network Navi” ( details. Others 15 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 15 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Index to parts and controls (Continued) Remote control 1 15 2 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 4 5 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 9 10 11 12 13 35 34 44 36 46 29 37 30 38 31 39 40 32 41 33 42 43 14 48 50 16 47 49 51 52 16 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 45 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction 1 OPEN/CLOSE button page 20 3 HDD button page 50 in 33 T.SEARCH button page 45, 50 4 TIMESLIP button page 68, 69 5 EASY NAVI button 36 ZOOM button 37 P in P button page 23 8 SLOW button 9 FRAME/ADJUST button page 62, 72 10 Direction buttons ( / / / ) 13 button page 60, 172 page 61, 62 page 40, 46 page 70 14 Number buttons page 45, 71 16 CH/Page buttons 17 DVD button page 20, 21 page 20, 23, 45 page 19 39 DIMMER button page 19 40 DISPLAY button page 78 41 REMAIN button page 33 42 SETUP button page 172 43 CLEAR button page 36 44 EDIT MENU button 45 AUDIO button page 102, 113 page 72 46 LIBRARY button page 132 page 26 in 47 PROG/HDMI button “INSTALLATION GUIDE” page 45, 66 18 INSTANT SKIP button page 70 48 CHP DIVIDE button page 61 20 CONTENT MENU button page 60 page 87 49 REC MODE button page 45 50 INPUT SELECT button 52 DELETE button 23 PICTURE SEARCH button 25 PLAY button page 66, 127 26 STOP button page 50, 61, 111 button page 46, 92 page 123 29 TOP MENU button page 66 30 MENU button*1 *1 MENU Use this to display a menu screen that is recorded on a DVD video disc. Operate the menu screen as the same manner as page 66)”. “Locating a title using the top menu ( A menu screen is not recorded on some discs. Others 28 page 55 page 62 page 23, 24, 60, 172 27 QUICK MENU button page 79 *2 RETURN Returns to the previous screen (the screen may be specified depending on the disc). Refer to the instructions of the disc. 17 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 17 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Function setup page 62 24 ENTER button page 50 page 23, 40 51 TIME BAR button 22 SKIP button Network Navi page 61 19 INSTANT REPLAY button 21 TV Guide button Library 15 ON/STANDBY button page 70 Editing 12 REC button page 67 38 FL SELECT button page 62 11 PAUSE button page 67 35 SUBTITLE button page 29 page 23 7 Menu button 34 ANGLE button page 71 Playback 6 Info button 32 TV CODE button page 50 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE” Recording 2 Buttons for TV operation “INSTALLATION GUIDE” 31 RETURN button*2 Introduction Index to parts and controls (Continued) Display 1 2 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 q PBC indicator Illuminates when a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD is loaded. w Program recording indicator Illuminates when the recorder holds a timer program. e Bit rate indicator Illuminates when displaying the bit rate selected for recording, or when displaying the actual bit rate. r REMAIN (Remaining space) indicator Illuminates when an available recording time is displayed. t VCD/CD indicator VCD : Illuminates when a VIDEO CD is loaded. CD : Illuminates when an audio CD is loaded. y DVD-RAM indicator Illuminates when a DVD-RAM disc is loaded. 8 9 17 u DVD-RW/R indicator Illuminates when a DVD-RW/R disc is loaded. i CHP (Chapter) indicator Illuminates when a chapter number is displayed. o SAP indicator Illuminates when receiving a SAP broadcast. page 67 !0 Angle icon Illuminates when playing a scene recorded with multi angles. !1 DUB (Dubbing) indicator Illuminates when copying. !2 PROGRESSIVE indicator Illuminates when video signals are output in the progressive format. page 183 !3 Picture quality mode indicator The current picture quality mode lights up. The modes are: MN (Manual)/SP (Standard Play)/ LP (Long Play) 18 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 18 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Dimming the display Pressing DIMMER button on the remote control changes the brightness of the display (normal/dimmed/off). Recording Switching the display Every time you press FL SELECT button, the display changes between the channel, title number, and time. The display may not change, depending on the disc or recording conditions. Playback Editing !4 TITLE indicator Illuminates when a title number is displayed. !5 TRK (Track) indicator Illuminates when a track number is displayed. Library !6 Channel indicator Displays the current channel or other numbers such as a title number, track number, bit rate or input selection. !7 Multi display Network Navi Displays the current time, elapsed time, remaining time, starting time of programmed recording, chapter number or message, etc. Function setup Others 19 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p012-019 19 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Before operating this recorder Is your recorder ready? Loading a disc • Refer to “INSTALLATION GUIDE” manual and finish the necessary preparations. • Turn on the connected equipment such as a TV or audio system and select the input from the recorder. Check disc compatibility beforehand ( and use a proper playable disc. Turning the power on (This owner’s manual instructions are based on the premise that all proper connections have been completed and the TV is turned on.) Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the recorder or on the remote control. page 6, 7) Caution • Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray. Neglecting this may cause serious personal injury. Keep a close watch on children. • Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. 1 Open the disc tray. on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE Press button on the remote control. button ON/STANDBY button/ ON/STANDBY indicator OPEN/CLOSE button ON/STANDBY button CH/Page buttons When the power turns on, the ON/STANDBY indicator changes from red (standby mode) to green (operation). After a few seconds, a start-up screen appears. The following icon appears at the top right corner of the screen. e.g. Loading 2 Insert a disc. Disc without a cartridge Insert with the playback side down. There are two kinds of disc size. Place a disc to fit the dish. If a disc is out of the dish, it may result in damage to the disc or malfunction. When this icon disappears, the recorder is ready to operate. If the disc drive contains a disc, it takes a little longer to start up. Viewing TV channels through this recorder After turning the power on, the recorder will output TV channel signals to the connected TV (also in the stop mode). You can select a desired channel by pressing the CH/ Page or the number buttons. Place a disc in the inside hollow. 20 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 20 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Function setup The “Unloading” icon appears at the top right corner of the screen, and ON/STANDBY indicator turns red, then the power turns off (Standby mode.) You can lock the disc tray. Press and hold PAUSE on the remote control for longer than about 3 seconds. To unlock, press the button for longer than about 3 seconds. Library Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the recorder or on the remote control. Disc tray lock (Child lock) Editing Turning the power off Note • If there are any performance malfunctions of the HDD or the DVD-RAM drive, immediately discontinue use of this recorder, and disconnect the power cord from a wall outlet, then contact your dealer. Continuous use of the recorder in such a condition will aggravate the condition and result in increased cost and repair time. Playback Notes • Use the button on the front panel or the remote control to open and close the disc tray. Do not push or hold the disc tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the recorder to malfunction. • Do not insert a disc which is unplayable, or any object other than a playable disc. • Do not apply downforce to the disc tray. Doing so may cause the recorder to malfunction. • If the disc tray stops while closing, the mechanical protection system of this recorder will open it. Do not force it to close. Doing so may cause malfunction. • If the disc tray would not open, turn the recorder off, and button on the front panel or OPEN/CLOSE button press on the remote control. This may turn the recorder on and open the disc tray. If it still wouldn’t open, contact your nearest TOSHIBA dealer. Recording 3 Close the disc tray. on the front panel or OPEN/CLOSE Press button on the remote control. Caution • If the power fails or the power cord is disconnected from a wall outlet while the recorder is in operation (ON/STANDBY indicator lit in green), the HDD or a loaded disc may become recording disabled. In such a case, executing an initialization of the disc using the formatting function of the recorder may refresh it. However, all contents stored on the disc will be completely erased by this initialization process. • This recorder may indicate alert messages with some DVD-RAM discs right after insertion. If such a disc is used for playback or recording on other equipment, all data in the disc may be damaged and the disc will not be played. By executing an initialization of the disc using the formatting function of the recorder, the disc will become operational. • If the recorder freezes and does not respond at all, leave it alone for about 15 minutes or longer. This may restore the recorder. After the recorder has recovered, turn it off once and turn it on again to use as usual. If the recorder is still inoperable after more than 15 minutes have passed, press and hold the ON/STANDBY button on the front panel for about 10 seconds or longer. The recorder is forced to quit and the power turns off. Turn the recorder on again and use it as usual. (This is an emergency measure, which may cause losses and/or damages of data. Avoid casual use of this measure. If you try this while the recorder is working properly, especially while the “Loading” or “Unloading” icon is flashing, it may result in initializing of the HDD.) (This 15-minute measure is available only when page 181)) “Screen protector” is set to “On.” ( Introduction DVD-RAM disc with cartridge (TYPE1/TYPE2/TYPE4) Single sided Turn the printed side up, and insert the cartridge into the tray frame following the direction of the arrow on the cartridge. Double sided Turn the desired recording/playback side up, and insert the cartridge into the tray frame following the direction of the arrow on the cartridge. Note • Turning the power off also unlocks the disc tray. Others 21 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 21 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Before operating this recorder (Continued) Start-up/Shutdown (closing) icons Status display These icons are displayed at the top right corner of the screen when startup or finishing. While they are flashing, the recorder is operating as follows: Each time you operate the recorder, the following displays appear on the TV screen to indicate the status of the recorder. Status display Loading Un loading Open Close Start-up, reading a disc, finishing the recording Unloading a disc, finishing the operation Opening a disc tray Closing a disc tray e.g. Main on-screen displays (Depending on the disc, some of these may not appear.) : Playback : Pause : Stop : Fast-forward* : Fast-reverse* : Forward skip** : Reverse skip** x1/2 : Forward slow-motion x1/2 : Reverse slow-motion : Forward frame by frame playback : Reverse frame by frame playback : Recording : Recording pause Title End : When title playback is completed : Instant skip : Instant replay Chapter Divide : Chapter division : Forward skip by 1/20 : Reverse skip by 1/20 * The number of the mark varies according to the playback speed you select. ** Accompanied with the followings: HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R : Title number/title name and chapter number/ chapter name DVD-VIDEO : Title number and chapter number : VCD CD Track number Notes • To disable the status display, set “On screen display” ( page 181) to “Off.” • You can add the current status of the settings to this display. See page 78. 22 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 22 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Using TV Guide On Screen® When using a satellite box, TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS service is not available for changing channels for TV viewing or setting recordings. page 43 for instructions. Only manual timer recordings are available. Please see e.g. CONTENT Title List MENU News Info Box HDD 1 / 2 Page 3:19 RECORDINGS Recording Press TV Guide. TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS service is displayed. Main service Video window Entering TV Guide On Screen mode LISTINGS Introduction The TV Guide On Screen system in your recorder is a free interactive program guide that provides up to 8 days of program listings for over-the-air, cable-ready and analog cable in your area. The system allows you to easily find, set up reminders and schedule recordings of your favorite TV programs. SEARCH INFO Press Menu now for Listings Options Move to highlight any show Press Enter to tune to current show in glid Press Menu for more current show options Info Welcome to TV GUIDE ON SCREEN select for more information Menu / / / bcd BOX GBS QBS TV Guide ENTER TODAY Using TV GUIDE ON SCREEN 3:00AM News Rainfield News News Charles Rose Fisher Everybody loves 3:30AM Nightline Limpsons Dave Live Jay Lean Playback CH/Page Spin Town Bill & Greg The LISTINGS service contains a list of up to 8 days of TV programs including today. To view a TV program Press / to select a TV program and press ENTER. Editing To view information of a TV program Press / to select a TV program and press Info. To close the Info Box, press Info twice. To access options (e.g., recording, reminder, etc.) See the next page. / / / : Moves the highlight. Network Navi RECORDINGS List all shows recorded through the TV Guide On Screen system. ENTER: Makes a selection or executes an action. Menu: Displays a Panel Menu with options. CH/Page: Scrolls one page up or down in the LISTINGS service. SEARCH Sort by keyword, movies, sports, HDTV, and more. SCHEDULE Review, add or modify scheduled recordings and reminders. Function setup INFO is displayed) Info: (while Changes the Info Box size. Opens a Help screen when you move the highlight on the service bar. SETUP Change the TV Guide On Screen defaults to your preference or redo. the setup The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents 6,498,895, 6,418,556, 6,331,877, 6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121. 23 23 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Notes • To exiting TV Guide On Screen mode, press TV Guide. • While the TV Guide On Screen system is displayed other menus (e.g. EASY NAVI, CONTENT MENU, EDIT MENU, LIBRARY MENU) are not available. To use these menus, exit the TV Guide On Screen system. In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV GUIDE International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of Transcontinental Inc., and is used under license by Gemstar-TV GUIDE International, Inc. RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 Library Buttons in TV Guide On Screen mode You also have access to the following services besides the LISTINGS service. While on the Main service bar select a service by pressing / , then press ENTER. If you press Info while a service is highlighted, an Info box opens to show you more information about the service. Follow any instructions provided. For details, see the next page. Introduction Using TV Guide On Screen® (Continued) Note Please note that over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide On Screen® data is required for the TV Guide On Screen® system to operate. TV Guide On Screen® does not work with satellite programming. Toshiba does not provide the TV Guide On Screen® data. Instead, the data is provided by a third party, which is responsible for the accuracy and availability of the data. Additionally, occasional compatibility issues may exist between the TV Guide On Screen® system contained in your HDD/DVD Video Recorder and the data provided by the third party. In the event that you experience any performance issues with your TV Guide On Screen® system, please do not hesitate to contact the Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. Consumer Solutions Department by calling (800) 631-3811 or by visiting http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp Services and options For more details press Info while navigating through the various options and services. LISTINGS If you select a TV program and press Menu, a panel menu appears under the video window. Press / to select an option then press ENTER. e.g. Episode Options go to Service Bar watch now set recording set reminder go to Service Bar Closes the menu, changes no information, and returns a Highlight to the Service Bar. watch now The selected TV program appears in a full screen. set recording You can set the TV program to record. See set reminder You can set a reminder to the TV program. See cancel Changes are canceled and this menu is closed. schedule reminder Your selections below are entered and this menu is closed. frequency Press / to select the frequency. auto tune TV Press / to select whether to tune to the channel. when Press / to select the time you want the reminder to appear. page 40. cancel page 26. e.g. Remind Options schedule reminder frequency once no auto tune TV when 1 min early cancel Tips on panel menu operation • / buttons move a highlight. If you see “ ” or “ ” on the top or bottom of a panel menu, CH/Page buttons can be used to turn the page. • To enter a digit, use the number buttons. • When a box has “ ” and “ ” on both sides, use / buttons to cycles between the options. • Press ENTER from an option to highlight the default command button (e.g., “done”). Press ENTER again to execute the action and close the panel menu. • To cancel any changes and close the menu, press Menu, or select “Cancel” then press ENTER. Notes • You can set the video window to remain on a single channel (“lock”) or change channels (“unlock”) as you navigate through LISTINGS. With a channel logo or “LISTINGS” is highlighted, press Menu button to display the option to select “lock” or “unlock”. • You can access a TV program advertised in a panel ad. While the panel ad is highlighted press ENTER. If the TV program is airing now, you would tune to it. A panel menu appears, if the program is in the future. SEARCH If you select this service and press ENTER, categories appear on a bar under the Service Bar. By selecting one of the categories, you can search TV programs. After searching, you can open “Episode Options” by pressing Menu to access the options (above). To search by Search type (Alphabetical, HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children, Educational, News, Variety, Series) 1) Press / to select a Search type. 2) Press / to select a category, then press ENTER. 24 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 24 06.3.20, 4:16 PM To search by entering a keyword Introduction 1) Press / to select “KEYWORD” then press ENTER. “Keyword Search” appears. 2) Press / to select “new search” then press ENTER. “Search Options” appears. 3) Press / to select “category” then press / to select a category. 4) Press / to select “enter keyword” then press ENTER. The keyboard appears. / / Recording / 5) Press to enter a keyword. e.g. CAL DONE Press / to select a entry point then press ENTER. The selected letter is entered. CANCEL C I O D J P E K Q F L R S T Y Z 4 5 ' BKSP U V W X 0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 SPACE . DEL CLR Press / / / to select then press ENTER. The text entry box is highlighted. Playback A B G H M N BKSP erases a letter on the left of the cursor. DEL erases a letter on the right of the cursor. SPACE inserts a space on the left of the cursor. CLR erases all letters. Editing 6) When complete, press / / / to select “DONE” then press ENTER. A list of all matching TV programs for that keyword is displayed. RECORDINGS Library If you select this service and press ENTER, TV programs previously recorded or currently recording are listed. You can select one from the list to view or delete. To list programs in alphabetical order or by date and time 1) While “RECORDINGS” is highlighted, press Menu. “Recordings Options” appears. / to select an option. e.g. Recordings Options view as Press / to select. group: Titles of recorded TV programs are listed. list: Displays a detailed list of every recorded program. sort by Press title: date: go to Service Bar view as sort by Network Navi 2) Press group title / to select. Listed in alphabetical order Listed by date and time, with most recent date and time first. Function setup done cancel 3) When complete, press / to select “done” then press ENTER. A list of all matching TV programs for that keyword is displayed. To play recorded program (“view as” is set to “group”) / to select an episode and press ENTER. to select a TV program then press ENTER. Notes • If you play a TV program which you played before, playback starts from where you last stopped. To view it from the beginning, select the TV program on RECORDINGS, then press ENTER and to select an episode then Menu. On “Episode Options” select “play from beginning” then press ENTER. • When “view as” is set to “list”, press / to select a TV program, then press ENTER. 25 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 25 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others 1) Press 2) Press Introduction Using TV Guide On Screen® (Continued) To delete recorded programs (“view as” is set to “group”) 1) Press / to select a TV program and press ENTER. 2) Press to select an episode and press Menu. “Episode Options” appears. 3) Press / to select “delete episode” then press ENTER. A confirming menu appears. 4) Press / to select “yes” or “no” then press ENTER. Note • When “view as” is set to “list”, press / to select a TV program and Menu. On “Episode Options”, press “delete episode” then ENTER. Press / to select “yes” or “no” then ENTER. / to select SCHEDULE If you select this service and press ENTER, reminder and recordings you set previously are listed. You can edit or delete them. 1) Press / to select a TV program. 2) Press Menu. “Schedule Options” appears. 3) Press / to select then press ENTER. e.g. sort by Schedule Options go to Service Bar sort by date new manual recording new manual reminder Press / to select how you display the list. (date, title, event) new manual recording You can set recording manually. See page 43. new manual reminder You can set a reminder manually. See below. done cancel e.g. Schedule Options go to Service Bar tune to channel delete recording edit recording set reminder cancel e.g. delete recording (delete reminder) A confirming menu appears. Press / to select “yes” or “no” then press ENTER. edit recording (set recording) Opens a menu. For a recording, see set reminder (edit reminder) You can set a reminder manually. See below. page 43. schedule reminder Your selections below are entered and this menu is closed. Remind Options schedule reminder date 07 14 05 start 01 00 pm end 02 00 pm channel 11 input TUNER auto tune TV no frequency cancel once date Press the number buttons to input the date (month, day, year). To shift the highlight, press / . start end Press the number buttons or / to input the time (hour, minute, am/pm). To shift the highlight, press / . channel Press the number buttons to input a channel number. input Press auto tune TV Press / to select whether the TV is automatically tuned to the channel you have selected. frequency Press / / to select the input. to select the frequency. Notes • When a reminder message appears, select an option by pressing / and then press ENTER. If you don’t make a selection within 30 seconds, the recorder proceeds with the scheduled recording or reminder. • If reminders conflict, “REMINDER CONFLICT!” appears. Press / to select an option, then press ENTER. 26 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 26 06.3.20, 4:16 PM SETUP If you select this service and press ENTER, options to change settings are listed. Introduction To execute the setup again 1) Press / to select “Change system settings” then press ENTER. Your current settings are displayed. 2) Press / to select your answer then press ENTER. 3) Follow the on-screen guidance. Recording To arrange the position the channel appears in LISTINGS To change the tuning channel number To switch channels on/off in LISTINGS 2) Press / to select a channel then press Menu. 3) Press / to select then press ENTER. e.g. Grid Options Press / to select “on” or “off”. on: the channel is always displayed. off: the channel is never displayed. auto-hide: the channel hides automatically. service Press tune channel Press the number button to enter a channel. position Press the number button to enter a desired position for the channel in LISTINGS. Editing channel go back to Setup channel on service tune channel position Playback 1) Press / to select “Change channel display” then press ENTER. “Grid Options” appears. Air 8 / to select the signal type of the channel. 1 done cancel / Library 4) When complete, press to select “done” then press ENTER. To change Info Box size / / to select “Change default options” then press ENTER. to select “General defaults” then press Menu. Network Navi 1) Press 2) Press “General Defaults” appears. 3) Press / to select then press ENTER. e.g. General Defaults Press / to select the initial size of the Info Box. box cycle Press / to select the size rotation when Info is pressed. auto guide Press / to select whether the recorder enters TV Guide On Screen system when powered on. Function setup i box size go to Service Bar box size box cycle auto guide done cancel last used all on 4) When complete, press / to select “done” then press ENTER. Others 27 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 27 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Using TV Guide On Screen® (Continued) To change recording defaults 1) Press / to select “Change default options” then press ENTER. 2) Press / to select “Record defaults” then press Menu. “Record Defaults” appears. e.g. Record Defaults start Press / to select the time to start recording. end Press / to select the time to end recording. recorder Press / to select the drive. quality Press / to select the recording mode. page 42.) (For details, see go to Service Bar start 1 min early end recorder quality 2 min late HDD EXP-Audio done cancel / 3) When complete, press to select “done” then press ENTER. To change reminder defaults 1) Press / to select “Change default options” then press ENTER. 2) Press / to select “Remind defaults” then press Menu. “Remind Defaults” appears. e.g. Remind Defaults auto tune TV Press / to select whether the channel is automatically tuned to the channel you have selected. when Press go to Service Bar yes auto tune TV when 2 min early / to select the time you want the reminder to appear. done cancel 3) When complete, press / to select “done” then press ENTER. Note on watching TV with TV Guide On Screen If you leave the recorder turned on without executing any action for about 3 hours, a message will appear on the TV asking you want to continue watching TV. If you want to continue watching TV, press ENTER. If you do not press ENTER, the recorder will automatically turn off within about 10 minutes. Notes • As the number of recorded TV programs increases, it may take several minutes for the TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS service to be displayed. In addition, conditions of the recorder can also vary the loading time. • The TV Guide On Screen menus shown in this manual are for illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and TV Guide On Screen information as illustrated may not be available in your area, may be subject to change. Gemstar-TV Guide International Inc. and/or its related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarantee service availability in your area. In no event shall Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in connection with the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system. 28 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 28 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU Introduction The EASY NAVI button opens “EASY NAVI Main Menu”, a main gate to the functions of this recorder. From this menu, you can access the desired functions while viewing a current picture. Additionally, QUICK MENU button provides you a sub menu of the current function. EASY NAVI Press EASY NAVI. Sound is muted and the following GUI appears. (Actual displays vary depending on operational status.) e.g. EASY NAVI HDD/DVD EASY NAVI HDD TV:12ch 005 2006/03/24 07:00am TV:18 Finder (00:54:30) Original Play Time 00:10:15 TV Viewing Play Contents TV Guide On Screen® DV Recording Format (RAM/RW) TR Time Slip Playback STOP Recorded title last selected HDD Cursor Delete Title Finalize (R/RW) PLAY Disc Main Menu ENTER / / / Recording Appears when the finder shows the current broadcast. Functions Dubbing Setup Operating the finder (For the HDD, DVD-RAM discs, DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder and not finalized yet) Editing 1) When the cursor is on the finder, press / . You can view thumbnails of recorded contents. • You can select the drive by pressing HDD or DVD button. 3) To stop, press STOP. A current channel broadcast appears. (“TV:xxxch” accompanies.) page • Pressing REC button starts recording. On recording, see 32. Library 2) When you find a desired content, press PLAY or ENTER. The content is played. • Pressing ENTER button enlarges the finder’s playback picture to the full of the screen. page 62. • You can change playback speed. See Item selection Network Navi Press / / / to select an item, then press ENTER. (Unavailable features are grayed out.) Item page Function TV Viewing Play Contents DV Recording Delete Title Dubbing Format (RAM/RW) Setup Recorded contents are listed in a thumbnail view. 60 TV Guide On Screen SCHEDULE appears. 26 The setting menu for recording contents from equipment connected to the DV IN terminal. 52 You can delete the current content. Operate according to the message. 55 You can access a menu to dub the current content. 100 You can execute the DVD-Video finalizing process on the loaded disc. 122 You can format the loaded disc. 34 A setup menu appears. 172 Others Finalize (R/RW) – Function setup TV Guide On Screen® Return to current broadcast channel. (Continued) 29 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 29 06.3.22, 4:09 PM Introduction Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU (Continued) To exit the EASY NAVI Quick Menu operation Press EASY NAVI again. To access various optional functions of this recorder, open Quick Menu. Quick Menu displays a list of selections relevant to your current mode. Note • For a disc other than the specified one, the finder cannot be operated. To play the disc, exit the EASY NAVI then press the PLAY button, or select the “Play Contents” function. Opening Quick Menu 1) Press QUICK MENU. The following menu (“Quick Menu”) appears. (Actual selections vary depending on operational status.) e.g. Quick Menu Restart title Title information Bit rate Special playback mode Exit 2) Press / ENTER. to select an item, then press To exit Quick Menu Press QUICK MENU again. Alternatively Select “Exit” with / , then press ENTER. 30 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p020-030 30 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Hint on reading this manual The following icons show the playable discs for each function described on this instruction manual. HDD : HDD DVD-RAM : DVD-RAM disc DVD-RW : DVD-RW disc DVD-R : DVD-R disc Recording Recording variations for many types of programs or situations. DVD-VIDEO : DVD video disc Before recording VCD : VIDEO CD CD : Audio CD (For CD containing JPEG or MP3/WMA files, see page 74, 76.) Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen® Recording a TV program Recording an external source Most instructions are based on remote control operation, unless otherwise noted. You can use the buttons on the remote control and those on the main unit as well when they have the same function. DV recording (Recording from a digital video camera) Deleting recorded contents Others If copy protection signal is detected during recording on this recorder, the recording automatically pauses and a message appears. In this case, the PAUSE button cannot release the recording. (It is possible to end the recording by pressing the STOP button.) If the copy protection signal continues, the recording will terminate. RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 31 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording Before recording Please be sure to read this critical background information prior to making a recording. This recorder is equipped with a built-in HDD. Conventional video cassette recorders have required tapes to record, while this recorder enables recording on the HDD whenever you want, without selecting an available tape or confirming its recording time or tape remaining. Further, the DVD-RAM drive on this recorder can record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc in the same way as a tape. You can also copy contents recorded on the HDD to a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc to create your own library. Is your recorder ready? Before recording a TV program on this recorder, insure that channels you want to record are correctly tuned in on this recorder. If not tuned in, read the separate “INSTALLATION GUIDE” volume again, and confirm all the necessary connections and settings have been done. Also, insure the clock is set precisely for program recording. Disc initializing Whenever you use a new DVD-RAM disc on this recorder, be sure to initialize the disc. For DVD-RAM discs, initialization is indispensable to the database system of this recorder. Normally, the HDD does not need to be formatted. If the HDD does not work normally due to a problem, format the HDD for possible recovery. Once you format the HDD, all the recorded titles and Library information are deleted. Before formatting, be sure to write library information to a DVD-RAM disc and check any titles to be deleted. DVD-RW discs can be emptied by initializing. DVD-R discs can be used on this recorder without initializing. For details of initialization of DVD-RAM discs, see page 34. If an initialized DVD-RAM disc is still unusable, it may become usable by executing “DVD-RAM physical format” in “Management settings” menu. For “DVD-RAM physical format”, see page 35. Note on recording on a DVD-RAM disc Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available DVD-RAM disc to record on ( page 6, 8). Some discs may need to be formatted for use on this recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute disc formatting. Follow the procedure displayed onscreen to format the DVD-RAM disc compatible with this recorder. Some DVD-RAM discs formatted on a PC may not be usable. Note • This recorder records on a DVD-RAM disc if it complies with DVD-RAM standard Version 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2. However, you may not record on some DVD-RAM discs that have complicated contents (often, to protect the recorded data). When you select a DVD-RAM disc that has already been recorded, check that the disc is suitable for recording or the remaining time of the disc is displayed. It is recommended to use a new DVD-RAM disc for an important recording. Note on recording on a DVD-RW disc Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available DVD-RW disc to record on ( page 6, 9). Some discs may need to be initialized for use on the recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute disc initializing. Follow the procedure displayed onscreen for initializing the DVD-RW disc compatible with this recorder. Some DVD-RW discs initialized on a PC may not be usable. To play a DVD-RW disc recorded on this recorder on an other device, finalize the DVD-RW disc on this recorder. ( page 122) The finalization disables the disc’s rewritability. To rewrite a finalized DVD-RW disc, cancel the finalization ( page 125). • On DVD-RW discs recorded on other devices, you cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or cancel the finalize process, or add recordings on this recorder. • DVD-RW discs which are recorded on other devices and not finalized yet, cannot be read on this recorder. Do not rush to initialization. Check that the contents can be erased or not. 32 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 32 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library 2) After checking the capacity, press REMAIN again to turn off the display. Network Navi When “HDD recording is not possible due to...” appears The HDD is full. To record new content, delete unnecessary titles or transfer some content to a DVDRAM disc. Function setup Notes Others • The “Loading” icon appears in the top right of the screen after recording. This indicates that the unit is executing the final recording process (writing managing information). Operations other than changing channels cannot be done until this icon disappears. The time for executing this process differs depending on the recording time or capacity of the disc. • Note that all recording content may be deleted if the unit is disconnected from a wall outlet, or a power failure occurs, during recording. • If a power failure occurs within 5 minutes prior to the programed recording start time, the programmed recording may not be executed. 33 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 Editing To check space remaining on a disc 1) Press REMAIN. The current capacity per disc is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The current capacity of the selected drive is displayed on the front panel display. Playback If you want to record contents which will be copied to a DVD-R/RW disc later on See page 48. When the programmed settings overlap Before the first recording is completed, the second program is scheduled to begin recording. When using a DVD-RAM disc, the recording of the previous program stops 10 seconds before the next program starts. (If you have been recording over 9 hours on the same drive, the current recording stops approximately 2 minutes before the next programme starts.) When using a DVD-R/RW disc, the recording of the previous program stops about 2 minutes before the next program starts, to complete data process. In this 2 minutes, you cannot operate the loaded DVD-R/RW disc. Recording To play a DVD-R disc recorded on this recorder on other devices, finalize the DVD-R disc on this page 122) recorder. ( The finalization permanently disables the disc’s writeability. (Canceling the finalization is not possible.) • DVD-Video finalize process cannot be canceled if once executed on a DVD-R disc. • On DVD-R discs recorded on other devices, you cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or add recordings on this recorder. • DVD-R discs with the method of “DVD-Video Creation” have been alreadly executed the DVDVideo finalize process. Therefore, they cannot be added the contents. Programmed recording and operational status The recorder gives priority to programmed recordings in every operating mode. Even if the recorder is playing, recording or editing, or even in standby mode, at a starting time of a programmed recording the recorder will make itself ready or stop those operations and start the recording. However, “Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW” page 112) and “DVD-Video finalizing process” ( page 122) operations may have priority over ( programmed recordings. Introduction Note on recording on a DVD-R disc Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available page 6, 9). DVD-R disc to record on ( 33 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording Before recording (Continued) Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical format) Be sure to read this section prior to using a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder for the first time. For DVD-R, initializing is not necessary. A disc should be initialized in the following cases: (The recorder may display a message to request you to do so.) e.g. Quick Menu Bit rate Special playback mode Disc management DVD compatible mode Aspect ratio(Video mode) DVD-Video:CHP create User record quality SAP Exit e.g. When you use a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder for the first time. If data fragments produced by repeated recording or erasing have accumulated. If a disc error has occurred. When you want to record on a DVD-RAM disc for PC. ( page 8) Initializing formats a disc logically and insures that it will perform to its full capability. However, this erases all data on the disc, so make sure that it does not matter if data on the disc is erased whenever you initialize a disc. 3) Press / ENTER. Disc information DVD format to select “DVD format,” then press e.g. DVD format How to initialize a disc To initialize a DVD-RAM disc, load it in the recorder. See page 20 for loading a disc. Disc Number Disc Name Start 1) Press QUICK MENU. The following menu appears. (The actual contents depends on the operational status of the recorder.) e.g. Quick Menu Bit rate Special playback mode Disc management DVD compatible mode Aspect ratio(Video mode) DVD-Video:CHP create User record quality SAP Exit 2) Press / to select “Disc management,” then press ENTER. A sub menu appears on the right side. Format 34 Edit Edit Cancel 0% Numbering a disc The recorder automatically numbers discs when initializing. However, you can assign a desired number (using 3 digits) and designate sides A and B on a doublesided disc. (DVD-RW discs cannot be numbered.) (1) Press / buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc Number” then press the ENTER button. (2) Press / buttons to select a digit. (3) Press / buttons to shift. (4) Repeat steps (2) and (3). (5) Press ENTER button. Naming a disc You can name a disc. (1) Press / buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc Name,” then press ENTER button. The character input window appears. (2) Enter a disc name following the procedure of “Entering characters” ( page 36). button to eliminate the window. (3) Press 34 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 0 0 1 – 06.3.20, 4:16 PM / to select “Start,” then press ENTER. Introduction 4) Press 1) Press SETUP. 2) Press / to select “Management settings” then press ENTER. e.g. e.g. DVD format Start Cancel 0% Format e.g. SETUP 3) Press / to select “DVD-RAM Physical Format,” then press ENTER. 4) Press / execute. to select “Yes,” then press ENTER to Playback 5) Press / to select “Start,” then press ENTER. Initialization starts. Management settings Network Setting Genre setting Off Front Display HDD auto stop Off All HDD titles delete HDD format DVD-RAM physical format DVD Drive speed setting High speed xxxx/xxxx Version (Main/DVD drive) Recording Entire disc contents excluding library data will be erased if disc is formatted. Proceed? DVD format Yes Format 18% When the initialization is completed, the setup window disappears. 5) Read the message, and press / to select “Yes” or “No”, then press ENTER. Function setup Notes • The physical format process may fail if executed to a dirty DVD-RAM disc. Also, the disc may be difficult to record, even if it is finished. Before executing DVD-RAM physical format process, be sure to confirm the disc is not dirty. Clean it if necessary. If the disc has scratches or dust beyond cleaner’s efficacy, do not execute DVD-RAM physical format process on the disc. • The following DVD-RAM discs require physical formatting: – A disc which is not formatted correctly. – The disc which has errors during writing because of dirt on the disc, and cannot be further recorded, or cannot initialize normally. • You need to start physical formatting from the first step again when you use a failed disc. • Physical formatting does not work if the disc contains a lot of voids beyond the limitation of this recorder. • If an error occurs in physical formatting, “ERR-01” appears in the front panel display. To turn off the message, press DISPLAY button on the remote control. Network Navi Physical formatting is a simple execution for a disc which cannot be used or read (or which is becoming hard to read). It may refresh such a disc for recording and playback. (There is no guarantee that all such discs will be recovered.) “DVD-RAM logical format” process only rewrites certain data on file system and management information, however, “DVD-RAM physical format” rewrites all data on a disc, therefore it takes a much longer time to complete. For a 4.7GB single sided DVD-RAM, about 70 minutes will be necessary. While processing, all recorder operations and functions including program recording will not work until the process is finished. Also this process erases all data stored on the DVD-RAM disc. To cancel, select “No”, then press ENTER button. Library DVD-RAM physical format No Editing Warning: It will take approximately 70 minutes to format a 4.7GB DVD-RAM and all data will be erased. Confirm that timer programing is not scheduled. Proceed? DVD Formatting Others 35 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 35 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording Before recording (Continued) Entering characters Indicates the end of the first line on CONTENT MENU. e.g. Cursor An entered character will appear here. CONTENT Title information MENU Indicates the limit of Characters displayable on CONTENT MENU. Chapter 003 The character being selected appears. Language 1 q a z English Spanish French German Italian etc... 2 w s x 3 e d c 4 r f v 5 t g b Space Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Input Cursor / 6 78 y u i h j k nm, Space 0 - = / ’ p [ ] : BkSp / Delete Space Clear All DELETE . ; CLEAR BkSp Direct(0-9) , # 9 o l . Caps Lock INSTANT SKIP @ All Clear : Save Space Operation guide Return Operation guidance of the remote control Switching a language To enter the character, normally use / / / buttons on the remote. About the other buttons to be used are shown on the operation guide. Before entering a character, move a cursor to the language selection area by pressing / buttons. Then press / buttons to select a language, then press ENTER button. : Shifts the cursor. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : Enters a number. DELETE : Erases one character immediately to the left side of the cursor. CLEAR : Erases all the characters. : Caps Lock : Saves the changes and returns to the previous screen. : Cancels the changes and returns to the previous screen. : Enters a space. , / # . ; INSTANT SKIP : Enters a symbol. 36 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 36 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Entering characters The cursor may be followed by unwanted characters. You can erase them if necessary by either of the following measures: Erasing characters Recording • Erasing all the characters on the writing board Select “Clear All” by pressing / / / buttons, then press ENTER button. Alternatively, press CLEAR button. Playback • Erasing one character before the cursor Select “BkSp” by pressing / / / buttons, then press ENTER button. Alternatively, press DELETE button. Editing (1) Press button to select an input mode. (2) Press / / / buttons to select a character, then press ENTER button. The selected character is input on the cursor. (3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) to enter characters. button to save the (4) When finished, press characters. The characters you entered appears. Library Notes • You can enter up to 64 characters. • When unnecessary information appears, or when you want to alter the input character, press CLEAR button to erase all, or press DELETE button to erase an unnecessary character. Network Navi Function setup Others 37 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 37 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording Before recording (Continued) Selecting a disc according to purposes of use (DVD-RAM/R/RW) There are various types of discs having different standards. Select one for your purpose of use. Purposes of use • Editing after recording (e.g. deleting unnecessary portions, dividing chapters). • Playing discs recorded on this recorder with other DVD players. • Recording so that the sound of bilingual broadcast can be switched. (Some DVD players may not play these discs.) • Recording a Recording-once-permitted program. • Pause TV. ChaseTV. Available disc DVD-R disc (Ver. 2.0/2.1) Available disc Internal HDD (hard disc drive) DVD-RAM disc (Ver. 2.0/2.1/2.2) Once you record on a DVD-R disc, you cannot delete or rewrite the contents in DVD-Video mode (Video mode). DVD-RW disc (Ver. 1.1/1.2) • You can repeatedly record/delete the contents. Finalizing a DVD-R/RW disc You can see the contents recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc with other DVD players by finalizing. For details, see page 122. When recording on a DVD-R/RW disc you need to set up the recorder due to the restriction by the DVDVideo standard. For details, see the next page. 38 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 38 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Setting for recording on a DVD-R/RW disc in Video mode This setting is necessary to play the contents on a DVD-R/RW disc with other DVD players. How to set up When recording in Video mode, there are some restrictions by DVD-Video standard. Therefore, it is necessary to set up these items below. Set up the items in advance before copying contents from the HDD to a DVD-R/RW disc. SETUP menu appears. SETUP 2 Select “DVD recorder operation” and press ENTER. e.g. DVD recorder operation User record quality Picture record mode Input Black level Standard Aspect ratio(Video mode) 4:3 DVD compatible mode Off DVD-Video:CHP create Off Rec DNR Off 3D Y/C separation On Relay recording On ENTER Main: In multichannel broadcasting, only the main sound is recorded. Note • When the number of chapters reaches a limit, chapters are not divided anymore. The limit number of chapters is dependent on conditions of a DVD-R/RW disc. e.g. DVD recorder operation ENTER User record quality Picture record mode Input Black level Aspect ratio(Video mode) DVD compatible mode DVD-Video:CHP create Rec DNR 3D Y/C separation Relay recording Standard 4:3 Off Off Off On On SETUP 4 Press / to select an item and press ENTER. ENTER Function setup Chapter dividing (“DVD-Video:CHP Create”) This is the setting to divide a title into some chapters. It is convenient to skip scenes. Off: Chapter dividing is not available. 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min: Select an interval for chapter dividing. 3 Network Navi Aspect ratio “4:3” and “16:9” cannot be mixed in one title. Therefore, set the aspect ratio before recording. 4:3: Set the aspect ratio to 4:3 16:9: Set the aspect ratio to 16:9 SETUP Select “Aspect ratio (Video mode)” and press ENTER. e.g. DVD recorder operation 4:3 16:9 Standard 4:3 Off Off Off On On Others User record quality Picture record mode Input Black level Aspect ratio(Video mode) DVD compatible mode DVD-Video:CHP create Rec DNR 3D Y/C separation Relay recording SETUP Set up “DVD compatible mode” and “DVD-Video: CHP create” as step 3, 4. 39 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 39 Library SAP: In multichannel broadcasting, only SAP sound is recorded. Editing This is not for recording on a DVD-R/RW disc. Depending on Picture/Audio settings, making DVD Video may not be possible. (When recording directly on a DVD-R/RW disc in DVD-Video mode, the recording proceeds with “Main” on even though “Off” is set.) 1 Press SETUP. Playback DVD compatible mode Only the main sound and SAP sound are available for recording in Video mode under DVD-R/RW standard. Off: Recording Items to set up 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen® To record TV programs and end them automatically, follow the procedures of this chapter. When using a satellite box, only manual timer recordings are available for setting recordings. page 43. See page 32). Before setting recording, see “Before recording” ( Preparation • When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder. – Load a disc which has sufficient remaining space to record the program. – Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected. • Make sure that the disc has enough space to record. page 39) • Set “DVD Compatible mode” beforehand. ( page 43) • To record satellite TV programs, set a recording manually ( If you do not need to change recording options (recording mode or time range), see “With recording frequency selection only” below. If you want to change these recording options, follow the procedure of “Changing the recording options” procedure ( page 41) or “Set recording by specifying details manually” ( page 43). With recording frequency selection only 1 Press TV Guide. TV Guide On Screen LISTINGS appears. TV Guide Start 2 Press / to select a TV program to record. For searching a TV program, see page 24. ENTER 3 Press REC repeatedly to select the recording frequency. REC Note • Recording will be executed on the defaut settings ( Each time you press REC button, the icon changes. page 42. For the icons, see page 28). 40 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 40 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Changing the recording options TV Guide / to select a TV Or to search for a TV program, see Recording 1 Press TV Guide, then press program to record. page 24. Start ENTER Playback 2 Press Menu. Editing “Episode Options” appears. Menu Library 3 Press / to select “set recording” then press ENTER. “Record Options” appears. ENTER e.g. Record Options schedule recording Network Navi frequency once start On time end On time recorder HDD quality XP-Audio cancel / to shift and press / Function setup 4 Press to select. frequency: See the next page. ENTER Others start: Choices are between 120 minutes early and 120 minutes late, to “On time”. (Default = ”On time”) end: Choices are between 120 minutes early and 120 minutes late, to “On time”. (Default = ”On time”) (Continued) 41 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 41 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen® (Continued) recorder: HDD: Records onto the HDD. DVD: Records onto a loaded disc. quality: See “Recording mode” 5 When complete, press / to select “schedule recording” then ENTER. “Record Options” is closed. The icon appears on the TV program. ENTER Note If you cancel the selections, select “cancel” then press ENTER button. Frequency of recordings/reminders and icon Recording quality (recording mode) Recording Reminder Icon Once One time execution Regularly Daily* Weekly Off Mode Bit rate Sound quality Recording time* XP-Audio 8.0 L-PCM 1 XP 9.2 EXP-Audio 4.8 EXP 6.2 SP-Audio 3.2 SP 4.6 D/M1 2 MP 3.0 D/M1 3 LP 2.2 D/M1 4 Meaning For a program on the same channel and at the same start time For a program on the same channel and at the same start time of Monday through Friday For a program on the same channel and at the same start time on the selected day of the week. Keeps infomation without executing, until the frequency is changed. *For “new manual recording” and “new manual reminder” only. 42 L-PCM D/M1 L-PCM 1 1.5 1.5 2 EP 1.4 D/M1 6 SEP 1.0 D/M1 8 User See page 183. *4.7GB DVD-RAM disc The recording times listed above are for reference purposes only and are not guaranteed. Recording times may vary. 42 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 D/M2 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Setting recording (For satellite box users) 1) Press TV Guide. 2) Press 2) Press to select “SCHEDULE”. / to select “SCHEDULE”. 3) Press Menu. “Schedule Options” appears. 4) Press / to select “new manual recording” then press ENTER. “Record Options” appears. 4) Press / to select “new manual recording” then press ENTER. “Record Options” appears. 5) Set the details. 5) Set the details. 3 5 6 7 8 9 to input digits. 0 e.g. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 to input digits. 0 / to change the parameter. e.g. Enter the date (Month/Day/Year). / Set the start time. Set the end time. Select a channel*. (For “Line 3” input only. Be sure to set “input” to “Line 3”.) Select a recording source. Tuner: TV broadcasts Line 1, 2, 3: Satellite TV, etc. Select “Line 3”. Select a recording media. / to shift. Select a picture quality. Select how often programmed recording is executed. * Available only when “IR control” is set to “On”. 6) When finishing the setting, press ENTER to select “schedule recording”. 7) Press ENTER again to close “Record Options”. 43 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 43 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Notes • The disc tray does not close automatically, even when the recording start time arrives. Set the recorder loaded an available DVD-RAM/R/RW disc beforehand. • It it not possible to record the same contents onto both the HDD and a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc simultaneously. • When there is little time before a programmed recording starts, you may not be able to start another recording. • Playback of the DVD drive pauses when a programmed recording onto the HDD starts. • Do not change TV Guide On Screen settings (e.g., cable input, brand, etc.) while a recording is programmed. After then, make the programing again if necessary. • Confirm the “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184) setting. “Main” or “SAP” records main sound or sub-sound of multiplex broadcasts respectively, and does not record the other. Therefore, select “Main” or “SAP” only when you record onto a DVDR/RW disc. • When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184) to the desired recording sound for each timer program. • When recordings conflict, “RECORDINGS CONFLICT!” appears. Read the message, and choose an option by pressing / then press ENTER button. Function setup 6) When finishing the setting, press ENTER to select “schedule recording”. 7) Press ENTER again to close “Record Options”. Select how often programmed recording is executed. Network Navi Select a recording media. Select a picture quality. Library Set the end time. Select a channel. to shift. to change the parameter. Enter the date (Month/Day/Year). Set the start time. / Editing 2 4 Playback 3) Press Menu. “Schedule Options” appears. 1 Recording 1) Press TV Guide. / Introduction Setting recording by specifying by details manually Recording Setting a timer recording using TV Guide On Screen® (Continued) Deleting a recording To stop a scheduled recording 2 ways are available. On LISTINGS 1) Press TV Guide. 2) Press / / / to select the TV program currently being recorded. 3) Press REC repeatedly until the recording icon disappears. 1) Press TV Guide. 2) Select a TV program you have set to record (icon displayed). 3) Press Menu. “Episode Options” appears. 4) Press / to select “delete recording”, then press ENTER. 5) Read the message, and press / to select “yes” (if you want to delete), then press ENTER to exit. Turning the power off automatically after completing a scheduled recording On SCHEDULE 1) While executing a scheduled recording, press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. 1) Press TV Guide. 2) Press / to select “SCHEDULE”. 2) Press / to select “Auto power off” then press ENTER. 3) Press / to select a TV program you have set to record. 4) Press Menu. “Episode Options” appears. 5) Press / to select “delete recording”, then press ENTER. Keeping the power on even after the scheduled recording finished 6) Read the message, and press / to select “yes” (if you want to delete), then press ENTER to exit. If the recorder turns itself on to execute a scheduled recording, it will turn itself off after finishing the recording. You can restrict this and keep the recorder powered on. 1) While executing a scheduled recording, press QUICK MENU. Correcting a recording 1) Press TV Guide. 2) Press / to select “SCHEDULE”. 2) Press / to select “Continuous power on” then press ENTER. 3) Press / to select a TV program you have set to record. 4) Press Menu. “Episode Options” appears. 5) Press / to select “edit recording”, then press ENTER. “Record Options” appears. 6) Change the selections. 7) Press / to select “schedule recording”, then press ENTER. 44 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 44 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Recording a TV program Introduction To record a TV program currently being broadcast, follow the procedures of this chapter. Preparation Start Press HDD or DVD to select a media to record on. Playback 1 Recording • When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder. - Load a disc which has sufficient space available to record the program. - Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected. • If you record on a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184) to “Main” or “SAP.” In DVD-R/RW recording, “Off” setting is regarded as “Main.” • If you record on a DVD-R/RW disc, set “Aspect Ratio(Video mode)” ( page 184) according to recording sources. HDD : To record on the HDD. DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc. HDD DVD Editing 2 Select a channel to record. Use any of the followings: • CH/Page buttons ( / ) • Number buttons page 23) • TV Guide On Screen ( CH/Page 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Library 1 0 Network Navi 3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode. Each time you press the button, the recording mode indicator (SP/LP/MN) on the front panel changes. REC MODE Function setup Recording mode The REC MODE button sets the following recording modes; 2 modes (SP, LP) with fixed picture and sound quality, and 1 (MN) for your customizing. e.g. When a single sided 4.7GB DVD-RAM is used: Recording time Picture quality SP Approx. 2 hours Standard quality LP Approx. 4 hours Inferior to SP MN Variable according to your setting. See page 46, 183. Others Recording mode (Continued) 45 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 45 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording Recording a TV program (Continued) You can set in advance the desired mode for each recording media (“HDD”, “DVD”). See below. Also for your customization of the MN mode, see below. 4 Press REC. Recording starts. REC Customizing the MN mode 1) During stop or at step 3 on QUICK MENU. page 45, press 2) Press / to select “User record quality” then press ENTER. 3) Change the setting for each recording media. • Press / to select “HDD” or “DVD”. • Press ADJUST to select the setting number (1 - 5). e.g. User record quality HDD Setting 1 Manual 6.6 L-PCM Custom setting Mode Setting 1 Manual 2 SP DVD SP Rate 6.6 4.6 ––– 4.6 D/M1 Audio quality L-PCM D/M1 3 LP 2.2 D/M1 4 Manual 6.0 D/M2 Notes • To record a high quality picture, select “MN” to raise a bit rate. The higher the bit rate, the better the picture quality is, but the shorter the recording length becomes. We recommend that you set this between 6.0 Mbps and 6.8 Mbps. • You can change the combination of picture and audio quality settings also by displaying the Quick Menu on LIBRARY MENU or in stop mode, then selecting “User Record Quality”. Either of the above methods updates the setting of this recorder. • If you set “SP” or “LP”, you cannot select “L-PCM”. • Depending on the audio quality settings, the upper limit for the picture quality setting differs. • You can adjust the manual rate for picture quality by 0.2 Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (You cannot set the rate from 1.4 to 2.0.) Manual 3.2 D/M1 5 Total recording time: approx. 71min. (with 4.7 GB unused) SETUP You can customize each setting. Press / / / to select “Mode”, “Rate” or ‘“Audio quality”, then press ADJUST to change the value. 4) Press ENTER. The menu disappears. 46 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 46 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording Playback Notes • During recording, you cannot change the recording parameters, such as modes, channels, etc. • The number of titles cannot exceed 99 for a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc or 396 for the HDD. • One continuous recording cannot exceed in any case 9 hours. Recording automatically stops at 9 hours. • Even during normal recording, you can set the programmed recording. • You cannot start recording immediately before a programmed recording starts. • For recorded sound, see page 73. • During monaural sound recording, the same sound is recorded on both the left and right channels. • When “Audio” is set to “L-PCM”, multi-channel sound is recorded as stereo sound. When playing this recorded sound, you will hear MAIN and SAP sounds simultaneously. Press AUDIO button to select a desired sound. • When “DVD compatible mode” is set to “Main” or “SAP”, the unit records the same sounds on both the left and right channels when receiving monaural sound. When receiving the multi-channel sound, the selected sound, Main or SAP, is recorded on both the left and right channels. • Depending on the disc contents, pressing REC button may take a longer time to start recording. • When a starting time of a programmed recording comes, a recording in execution is stopped and the programmed recording starts. If you do not want to stop the recording, cancel the timer program before it starts. • Even if you set “Aspect ratio(Video mode)” ( page 184) to “16:9”, images are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio when using a DVD-R/RW disc with “Rate” set to “1.0” (Mbps) or “1.4” (Mbps). Editing To view a TV program while recording another Press STOP. 1) Start recording on this recorder. 2) On a connected TV, select the TV mode. To pause recording (to omit an unnecessary portion) Note • Pausing recording automatically creates a new chapter division at that point. 3) Using the channel selector of the TV, select a desired channel on the TV. To reduce noise on recordings (Rec DNR) Before recording, set “Rec DNR” ( Network Navi During recording, press PAUSE. To resume recording, press it again. Library To stop recording page 185). To record and play at the same time 1) During recording, press PAUSE. Recording pauses. 2) Press CH/Page or the number buttons to change the channel. 3) Press PAUSE to resume recording. To start recording while playing a disc Stop playback, then select the other disc by pressing HDD or DVD button, and start recording on that disc. To play a disc while recording on another disc Select the disc that is not being recorded by pressing HDD or DVD button, and start playback on the disc. 47 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 47 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Note • During a dubbing job, the unoccupied drive is available for recording or playback, however, cannot perform a function which records and plays simultaneously. Function setup To change a TV channel to be recorded Recording Recording a TV program (Continued) To play a recorded title while recording another on the same disc (Recorded Title Play) HDD DVD-RAM During recording, you can play a title recorded on the same disc. 1) While recording, press CONTENT MENU. 2) Press / / / to select a desired title, then press ENTER. Playback of the selected title starts. Pressing STOP button stops playback, and the content currently being recorded returns. If you press PLAY button, playback resumes from the location you last stopped. Notes • The playback picture may appear after a delay of several seconds. • While you are using this function, the following operations/ functions are not available. - Programmed playback (repeat playback, intro scan etc.) - Editing (Playlist programming, dubbing, title/chapter naming, title thumbnail setting, etc.) • This function is not available during the 10 minutes page 56). overlapped portion of the relay recording ( • Depending on the data condition, playback may pause. • During a dubbing job, this function is not available. When recording contents which will be copied to a DVD-R/RW disc later on Before recording, set “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184) to “On”. Each timer program must to be set its “DVD compatible mode” from Quick Menu. Creating chapters while recording Press CHP DIVIDE button. The content is divided into two chapters at the point you pressed the button. Note • If you want to divide into chapters at desired points on DVD-R/RW discs, use this method. On those discs, you cannot create chapters after recording. Creating chapters automatically at regular intervals Set “DVD-Video:CHP Create” ( page 185). 48 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p031-048 48 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Recording an external source Introduction You can record programs from connected equipment on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc. Connect according to A or B. A: Using the input jacks on the rear of the recorder To video output jack INPUT1 (L-1) Audio cable INPUT3 (L-3) Red To audio output jack White Yellow Rear of the recorder Recording • To record a clearer picture, use the S video jack. Video cable External equipment Playback To video output jack To audio output jacks B: Using the input jacks on the front of the recorder Editing Audio cable Video cable Yellow White Red Library For recording from a digital video camera recorder, etc. connected to the DV input terminal on the front panel, see page 52, “DV recording.” INPUT 2 (L-2) Network Navi Preparation • When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder. – Load a disc which has sufficient remaining space to record the program. – Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected. RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 49 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others 49 Function setup Notes • If a source of high quality sound track such as DVD audio is recorded with this recorder, the sound quality becomes regular audio CD quality. Refer to the instructions of the connected equipment. • When you record an external source onto a DVD-R/RW disc or the contents which will be copied to a DVD-R/RW disc later on, set the connected equipment to output sound you want to record (if selectable such as multiplex broadcasting), as the recorder records sounds of an external source in stereo onto a DVD-R/RW disc, ignoring the setting of “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184). • DVD-R/RW discs cannot record contents with copy restriction signal embedded (copy-protected or copy once contents), DVD-RAM discs can record copy once contents. • Some satellite programs via a connected tuner may contain both 4:3 pictures and 16:9 pictures. DVD-R/RW discs cannot record such contents under the restriction of the DVD-Video standard. To record these programs, use the HDD or DVD-RAM discs. • Depending on the source recording device used and how that device is set up, the video and sound quality of the recording may vary slightly from the video and sound quality of the source device. Recording Recording an external source (Continued) 1 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly so that “L-1,” “L-2,” or “L-3” appears on the front panel display, corresponding to the input in which the device is connected. Each time you press the button, the indicator changes. INPUT SELECT L-1: To record pictures from equipment connected to the INPUT1 jacks on the rear panel. L-2: To record pictures from equipment connected to the INPUT2 jacks on the front panel. L-3: To record pictures from equipment connected to the INPUT3 jacks on the rear panel. L-U: To record pictures currently played ( page 110). Select “L-3” to record pictures from a connected satellite box using the DSS set top box control function. 2 Press HDD or DVD to select a recording media. HDD HDD : To record on the HDD. DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc. DVD 3 Press REC of this recorder to start recording. REC Start 4 5 Start playback of the source content on the connected equipment. When recording is completed, press STOP. STOP 50 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 50 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Notes on recording from a connected VCR or camcorder Editing When recording from a camcorder Follow the above notes. Be sure to power the camcorder with its AC adapter, not batteries. If batteries are run down, the recording may not be finished completely. Playback Do not operate the source equipment during recording on this recorder. Operations such as pausing, resuming, fast-forwarding (CUE) and fast-reversing (REVIEW), etc. may produce noises, which may be detected as copy protection signals. Therefore, first start playback on the source equipment to confirm that the desired source can be played properly, and then start recording on this recorder. Do not operate the source equipment during recording. After completing the desired scene, stop the recording on the recorder, and then stop the playback on the source equipment. Delete unnecessary scenes using editing functions ( page 55). If you want to operate the source equipment during recording, pause or stop the recording. After operating the source equipment, resume the recording as above. Recording Check the condition of the source equipment before playing. Set the equipment in a good condition, e.g. clean the head or adjust the tracking, etc. to obtain optimum playback. Bad conditions may produce noises in playback. These noises may be detected as copy protection signals, resulting in a stoppage of the recording. Play a source in an usual mode. Avoid using any correcting or enhancing features, as they may add signals which can be detected as copy protection signals. Source quality or tape condition beyond adjustments on the source equipment may stop a recording on this recorder. Library Network Navi Function setup Others 51 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 51 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DV recording (Recording from a digital video camera) You can connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV IN terminal to record from it. Preparation • Press HDD or DVD button to select a recording media • Connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV IN terminal on the front panel. DV IN terminal 1 Press EDIT MENU. “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears. EDIT MENU 2 Press / to select “DV Recording”. e.g. EDIT MENU HDD Main Menu ENTER When using DV terminal, it is used for setting up Auto Chapter Creation and User record quality. Edit Functions DV Original Picture 1 3 3 4 5 Press ENTER. “EDIT MENU DV Recording (Option Setting)” appears. ENTER Start 2 Playlist Editing Dub Selected Items Rate Conv. Items Combine ORG Title DVD-Video Creation DVD-Video Finalizing Del Selected Items Recording Saved Title Source DV Recording Chapter Editing DV Recording e.g. EDIT MENU DV Recording (Option Setting) DV Chapter Create Off By Date DVD-Video:CHP Create Off 5min. DV Audio Input Stereo1(L2+R2) User record quality SP 4.6 B D/M1 By Scene 10min. 15min. 20min. Stereo2(L2+R2) Change Next A This display will also appear when a DV format digital video camera connected to the DV IN terminal is turned on. 52 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 52 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction / / to make the settings. As you select each item, an explanation is provided. ENTER To change the picture and sound rates: 1) Press / buttons to select “Change” then press ENTER button. 2) On the “User record quality” display, press ADJUST button to select a setting number. 3) Press ENTER button. Press / ENTER. / / Playback 5 / Recording 4 Press to select “Next”, then press Details of the recording appears. EDIT DV Recording Editing e.g. ENTER Equipment with DV Terminal “Play” and then “Pause” with the connected equipment to DV. Manufacturer ------------------Playback Time MENU Equipement ------------------- ––:––:––:––F Recording Media : DVD B A 7 Press / ENTER. / Network Navi 6 Play a connected DV format digital video camera and pause the playback at a desired scene. / Library Rec Rec Stop(Save) Recording Time ––:––:–– Remaining Space ––:––:–– User record quality SP 4.6 D/M1 DV Chapter Create Off Full Display End Return to select “Rec”, then press ENTER Function setup Recording starts. To pause the recording, select “Pause” by / / / buttons then press ENTER button. To stop the recording, select “Stop (Save)” by / / / buttons then press ENTER button. Others 53 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 53 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording DV Recording (Recording from a digital video camera) (Continued) Notes • The DV IN terminal of this recorder supports only input from a DV format digital video camera. It cannot output to a connected device. Some models of DV format digital video cameras may be not compatible. • At step 5, you can enlarge the video image by selecting “Full Display”, then pressing ENTER button. • If “DV Chapter Create” is set to “Off” and you record onto a DVD-R/RW disc, chapters are automatically made according to “DVD-Video:CHP create” setting page 185). The number of chapters has the limit. ( Chapters are divided with a margin of about 0.5 second or less according to the DVD-Video standard. • DV recording does not start in the following cases: - While recording or in the time slip mode. - While operating TV Guide On Screen, CONTENT MENU or LIBRARY MENU. - If the recorder’s clock is not set yet. - Within 2 minutes before programmed recording starts, or during programmed recording. • If DV recording overlaps with programmed recording, the DV recording will stop 2 minutes before the programmed recording starts, and the programmed recording will be executed. • DV recording does not work if the DV IN terminal is connected to equipment other than DV format digital video camera, such as a PC. • Depending on the connected DV format digital video camera, the display at step 5 may not show “Manufacturer” or “Equipment”. • If the DV IN terminal is connected to more than one DV format digital video camera, DV recording may not work properly. For proper functioning of DV recording, connect only one device to the DV IN terminal. • DV recording is not compatible with Relay recording. • Do not keep the DV IN terminal connected unless you record from a DV format digital video camera, as it may give influence on the recorder if operated. • If you leave “EDIT MENU DV Recording” unoperated for about 15 minutes, it switches to the full mode if “Screen protector” ( page 181) is set to “On.” • When you want to record both stereo 1 and stereo 2 sounds from a DV format digital video camera, additionally make a connection to the audio input jacks on this recorder using cables such as audio/video cables supplied with the DV format digital video camera. ( page 52) • If a DV format digital video camera is not recognized, pull out the plug and connect it again. • Some models of DV format digital video cameras may support a different compression format. From such equipment, recording is not possible. • Depending on the models of DV format digital video cameras, recording may not work properly or some functions may be disabled. • On an input source from a DV tape which is partly recorded over, chapters may not be made properly. 54 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 54 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Recording HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Deleting recorded contents Introduction Important note Any deleted title/chapter (original) cannot be restored. Before deleting, be sure to check contents on the disc. On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not possible. To delete a title (chapter) To display chapters, press e.g. CONTENT Title List MENU / / / Recording 1 Start Press CONTENT MENU, then press to select a title to delete. button. HDD 1 / 2 Page HDD : 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original 2006/03/29 09:00 pm TV:3 (0:52:40) Original 2006/04/07 11:00 am TV:4 (0:30:08) 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) 3 Read the message and press “Yes,” then press ENTER. Editing 2 Press DELETE. Select a title to delete pressing / / / . Playback 2006/03/24 07:00 am TV:4 (0:53:45) Original Alternate method: Press QUICK MENU button, then press / buttons to select “Title delete” (“Chapter delete”) and press ENTER button. Library / to select Network Navi Deleting multiple specified parts 4) Select a part (a title or chapter) to delete. (To select a part, see page 93 – 94.) 5) Press repeatedly to select “Start”, then press ENTER. The recorder begins the deletion process. To cancel deleting, press / then press ENTER button. buttons to select “No”, Others Notes • Deleting a title (a chapter) decreases the numbers of the succeeding titles (chapters). • A chapter for under 5 seconds or shorter may not be deleted. Deleting a short chapter may not change the display of the available disc volume. • Deleting a playlist title/chapter does not affect the original title/chapter. • Deleting an original title/chapter affects all the corresponding playlist title/chapters. • Deleting all chapters in a title erases the title itself. • Titles and chapters which contain still pictures cannot be deleted. • On a DVD-R/RW disc, deleting is not possible if the disc is finalized ( page 122). • Chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc cannot be deleted. • On a DVD-RW disc, only the last title recorded can restore the disc capacity by being deleted. • On a DVD-R disc, deleting cannot restore the disc capacity. 55 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 55 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Function setup 1) Press HDD or DVD to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to delete. 2) Press EDIT MENU. 3) Press / to select “Del selected items,” then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Del Selected items” appears. Recording Others To protect recorded content You can protect recorded contents of the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc from unexpected deletion. Protection is provided for each title (original). 1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Playing recorded page 60) to contents (CONTENT MENU)” ( select a title. 2) Press QUICK MENU button, and press / buttons to select “Title information”. Then press ENTER button. 3) Press QUICK MENU button, and press / buttons to select “Lock” and then press ENTER button. appears. The mark Notes • To cancel protection, repeat this procedure. • Disc initialization erases all titles on a disc even if they are protected. page 186) erases all • Executing “All HDD titles delete”( titles on the HDD even if they are protected. Technical Information About recording time The recording time of a typical VCR (Video Cassette Recorder) is determined by the length of a video tape and recording speed (SP, LP, etc.). Video tapes with various recording times are available on the market. On the other hand, the recording time of a DVD-RAM/ R/RW depends on the bit rate (Mbps: amount of data transmitted per second), which can be varied in MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group2) compression technology. As an example, when you pour water into a bucket from a faucet, the faster the water flows, the sooner the bucket is filled with water. On the other hand, the slower the water flows, the more slowly the bucket is filled. A DVD-RAM/R/RW is, so to speak, like a bucket, and the degree you turn the faucet is bit rate, the time required to fill the bucket with water is the recording time available for a disc. The higher you set the bit rate (making much more water flow), the sooner a disc is filled. Consequently, the recording time becomes shorter. The lower you set the bit rate, the longer time it takes to fill a disc. About picture quality (SP, LP, MN (Manual) mode) Relay recording HDD DVD-RAM This function automatically diverts a recording to the HDD if a DVD-RAM disc is near capacity. When the remaining time of the DVD-RAM disc has reached about 10 minutes, the recorder starts recording the same content on the HDD as well as DVD-RAM. The chapter marks are automatically made at the start and end points of the overlapped recording portion. You can delete the unnecessary overlapped portion afterwards by referring to the chapter marks. Recording end DVD-RAM disc 10min. HDD Recording start To engage the Relay Recording function, set “Relay recording” to “On” ( page 185). Notes • When the capacity of the HDD is not sufficient, the operation is canceled. • While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot pause the recording. • While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot play a recorded title on the same disc. • When another programmed recording is set just after the relay recording, the relay recording stops about 2 minutes before the next programmed recording starts. The higher you set the bite rate, the more the volume of information for the picture. The lower the bit rate, the less the volume of picture information. However a high bit rate does not always mean that the picture quality is high. The difference between the 1.4 Mbps and 9.2 Mbps is obvious, but when comparing similar bit rates, the difference may be insignificant. Generally when you set the bit rate low for a longer recording, the data volume shortage will result in a lack of detail information. As a result, the picture quality is decreased (more noticeable with dynamically moving images). For example, square noises (block noise) may occur in a scene with fast action or a scene with light and shadows, such as a water surface. This recorder has two settings, 2 hour recording at “SP” mode or 4 hour recording at “LP” mode (both assume a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM). It is recommended to consider the “SP” mode as a standard mode and use the “LP” mode when you want to record for long time regardless of the picture quality. When you want to record a music program or animation with high picture quality, it is recommended that you select the “MN” mode. If you select more than 6 Mbps, you can usually record with considerably higher picture quality. However the higher you set the bit rate, the shorter the recording time. 56 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 56 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction D /M1, D /M2 Recording Sound recording format onto DVD-RAM discs. When recording, sounds are converted into digital signals and compressed. In playback, they are extracted to the D /M1 original sound. The standard differenciates D /M2 in data volume to use. D /M1 and and D /M2 are applied the digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories. Dolby D /M1 and Dolby Digital Digital 192 kbps is set for D /M2. 384 kbps for L-PCM (Linear PCM) Playback Sound recording format, like Dolby Digital. However, sounds are converted into digital signals and recorded as they are without compression. This process requires more data than Dolby Digital. Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others 57 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 57 06.3.20, 4:16 PM RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p049-058 58 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback Play your favorite contents. Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) Playing a DVD video disc Other playback functions RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 59 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) Titles and chapters recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc are displayed in thumbnail view, so that you can easily locate a desired one. page 25. You can play recorded TV programs also from TV Guide On Screen. See 1 Press CONTENT MENU. CONTENT MENU “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears. e.g. CONTENT MENU Title List 1 / 2 Page HDD HDD : Start Attribution (original/playlist) 2006/03/24 07:00 am TV:4 (0:53:45) Original 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original 2006/03/29 09:00 pm TV:3 (0:52:40) Original 2006/04/07 11:00 am TV:4 (0:30:08) Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original You can switch between HDD and DVD drives by presing HDD or DVD button. 2 Press ENTER 3 / / / to select a title (chapter). You can view succeeding or prior pages by pressing / ) button. PICTURE SEARCH ( To select a chapter, select a title and press button. The Chapter List appears. button again, you can return to Title List. By pressing Press ENTER. Playback starts from a selected title (chapter). ENTER Notes • On CONTENT MENU, titles (Original) precede titles (Playlist) in order from the oldest one respectively. • To turn off CONTENT MENU, press CONTENT MENU button. Absence of operations for longer than about 15 minutes also turns off CONTENT MENU. • The mark is displayed in every thumbnail when “HDD/RAM title play” ( page 183) is set to “Title resume”. When set to “Serial playback”, it is displayed in a thumbnail last operated. • You can change a thumbnail picture. See page 126. • You cannot display CONTENT MENU for DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices. • For playing a recorded title while recording another, see page 48. • A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This thumbnail cannot start playback. 60 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 60 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Each recorded content is displayed as its thumbnail. HDD 1 / 2 Page HDD : 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original 2006/03/29 09:00 pm TV:3 (0:52:40) Original 2006/04/07 11:00 am TV:4 (0:30:08) Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original A recorded title is marked with “Original”. A fictitious title created by editing is marked with “Playlist”. Titles (Original) precede titles (Playlist) in order from the oldest one. To skip back in pre-determined increments During playback, press INSTANT REPLAY. Each time you press the button, you can go back by the specified time to resume playback. You can select the interval per press of the button. See “Instant replay interval” ( page 183). Notes • This operation may not work for some discs. • Depending on the structure of a disc, some operations may be limited. • Depending on playback conditions, some operations may not work. Erasing content Library 1) On CONTENT MENU, select an unnecessary title (chapter). To stop playback STOP 2) Press QUICK MENU. A Quick Menu appears. Press STOP. PAUSE Press PAUSE. 3) Press e.g. Note • Sound is muted in still mode. To skip by 1/20 of whole / to select “Title delete”. CONTENT Title List MENU Quick Menu 1 / 2 Page HDD HDD Title : information 2004/06/08 07:00 Create thumbnail am TV:4 High speed dubbing (0:53:45) Rate conversion dubbing Chapter functionOriginal 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original Edit function 2004/06/12 09:00 Special playback pm mode TV:3 Save captured images(0:52:40) Disc informationOriginal Display changeover 2004/07/12 11:00 Specific page pmjump TV:4 Title delete (0:30:08) Exit Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original 4) Press ENTER. The confirmation message appears. Others During playback, press / . Each time you press the button, you can skip by 1/20 of the current title or track if it is longer than 1 minute. / Function setup To resume normal playback, press PLAY button or PAUSE button. / Network Navi To pause playback (still playback) 5) Press / to select “Yes” or “No” then press ENTER again. 61 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 Editing This shows that the recorder memorizes the location you last stopped playback in each title. To use this function, set “HDD/RAM title play” to “Title resume”. ( page 183) You can make the recorder memorize only the very last point, regardless of the number of titles. Set “HDD/RAM title play” to “Serial playback”. ( page 183) During playback, press INSTANT SKIP. Each time you press the button, you can skip by a specified time. You can select the interval per press of the button. See page 182). “Instant skip interval”( Playback 2006/03/24 07:00 am TV:4 (0:53:45) Original To skip the contents in pre-determined increments Recording CONTENT Title List MENU Introduction Reading CONTENT MENU 61 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued) Playing at various speeds HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Playing in fast reverse or fast forward During normal playback, press PICTURE SEARCH. SE AR CH : Fast forward playback : Fast reverse playback P U IC T RE Each time you press the button, the playback speed changes. During fast forward playback at “ ” speed, sound is reproduced. (Not available on VIDEO CD.) • This function is not available when you play a title recorded on a DVD-RAM disc while recording another. Notes • The playback speed may vary depending on the disc. • Depending on the disc or data condition, picture and sound in fast forward playback at “ ” speed may be disturbed. Skipping to the next/previous chapter or track Press SLOW during playback. Press SKIP ( / ) repeatedly until the chapter or track number you want appears. SL Playing in slow-motion (Not available in CD playback) : Forward slow-motion : Reverse slow-motion OW SK IP Each time you press the SLOW button, the slow-motion speed changes. • To resume normal playback Press PLAY. Notes • Slow-motion does not provide smooth playback. • When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse slow-motion playback is not available. • The speed level displayed is approximate. Playing frame by frame 1) During playback, press PAUSE. A still picture is displayed. PAUSE 2) Press FRAME ( / ). : Playback direction : Opposite direction FR AM E /A DJ US Notes • Some titles may not display chapter numbers. • When playing the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, you can access chapters only in the current title if “HDD/RAM title play” ( page 183) is set to “Title resume”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Serial playback”. • When playing a DVD video disc or a DVD-R/RW disc, you can locate chapters only in the current title if “DVD title stop” ( page 178) is set to “On”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Off”. However, in this instance even though you press SKIP button ( ) to go back to the previous title, playback will not start from the last chapter of the title but from the first chapter. Viewing still pictures DVD-RAM DVD-VIDEO (Playing a disc that contains still pictures) 1) Press PLAY. T PLAY • To resume normal playback The first still picture on a disc is displayed. Some DVD video discs may allow you to change the pictures using the PLAY, ENTER or SKIP button. Press PLAY or PAUSE. 2) Press FRAME ( FR AM /A E Notes • Sound is muted during frame by frame playback. • Frame by frame playback cannot provide smooth playback. • Picture may advance more than 1 frame at a time. • Depending on scenes, some frames may not be played. • When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse frame by frame playback is not available. Playback starts from the selected chapter or track. : Playback starts from the beginning of the next chapter or track. : Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track. When you press twice, playback starts from the beginning of the previous chapter or track. DJ US T 62 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 62 / ). : Displays the next still picture. : Displays the previous still picture. 06.3.20, 4:16 PM The recorder memorizes the location you last stopped playback to resume from there. This feature repeats playback of about 5 seconds and skip of 1 minute from the beginning to the end of a recorded title, so that you can view the digest of it. To use this function, set “HDD/RAM title play” ( page 183) to “Title resume.” The recorder will memorize the location you last stopped at in each title, so you can resume playback from there. For example, if there are 6 titles, you can start each of them as if you had stored 6 video tapes in the recorder. 1) Perform steps 1 and 2 on page 60, and select a title that you want to view the digest. • To play another title Press CONTENT MENU button to display “CONTENT MENU Title List,” then select a title. 4) Press / to select “Skip search”, then press ENTER. The Skip Search starts. Notes • This feature can be used for only one title (original) recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc. • While using this feature, you cannot use speed-related functions such as fast forward or fast reverse. • If you press ENTER button while using this feature, the normal playback starts. • To cancel this feature, press STOP button twice. Viewing the first scene of a title (Original) (Intro scan) 1) After step 1 on page 60, press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. 2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”, then press ENTER. You can go forward or back by pressing SKIP buttons. : to go to the next title. Notes • To stop Intro Scan, press STOP button twice. • This feature can be used for only titles (Original) recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc. Set “HDD/RAM title play” ( page 183) to “Serial playback”. You can play all titles in the HDD and DVDRAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one video tape. 63 63 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Playing all titles (original/playlist) in a disc Function setup : to go back to the current title. Press twice to go back to the previous title. 4) When you find a desired title, press ENTER. The selected title is played. RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 Network Navi 3) Press / to select “Intro scan”, then press ENTER. The recorder plays the first 5 seconds of each title beginning from title 1. Library Notes • Depending on conditions or contents, playback may not start from the location last stopped at, but instead another location. For example, from the beginning of the disc or title. • Depending on a disc, there may be a slight difference between the location the recorder memorizes and the actual location where playback starts. • This function is not available on DVD-R/RW discs. • The resuming function will not work if the write-protect tab is set to “PROTECT” ( page 8). 3) Press / to select “Special playback mode”, then press ENTER. Editing You can make the recorder memorize only the very last point, regardless of the number of titles. Set “HDD/RAM title play” ( page 183) to “Serial playback.” • To return to the beginning of the title Press SKIP ( ) button repeatedly until the beginning of the title appears. • To play the other title Press SKIP ( / ) button repeatedly. 2) Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu is displayed. Playback • To return to the beginning of the title During playback, press QUICK MENU button, then press / buttons to select “Restart title,” then press ENTER button. Recording Playing the digest (Skip Search) Introduction Resuming playback from the location last stopped (Title resume) Playback Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued) Playing all titles (original) in a disc (Play All ORG Titles) Checking the background information on a selected title You can play all Original titles in the HDD or a DVDRAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one video tape. 1) At step 2 on page 60, select a title (chapter) then press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. 1) Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. 2) Press / to select “Title information”, then press ENTER. Detail information of a selected title (chapter) appears. You can switch the chapters on the title by / ) buttons. pressing PICTURE SEARCH ( 2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”, then press ENTER. e.g. Quick Menu Bit rate Intro scan Special playback mode Skip search Disc management Repeat all ORG titles DVD compatible mode Play all ORG titles Aspect ratio(Video mode) DVD-Video:CHP create User record quality SAP Notes • From Quick Menu on “CONTENT MENU Title Information”, you can change the details such as names, genres or dates which will help sorting and searching on Library system ( page 132). Also you can protect the title from unexpected erasure ( page 56). • To return to the previous menu, press button. • To cancel the procedure, press CONTENT MENU button. Exit 3) Press / to select “Play all ORG titles”, then press ENTER. e.g. Quick Menu Bit rate Intro scan Special playback mode Skip search Disc management Repeat all ORG titles DVD compatible mode Play all ORG titles Aspect ratio(Video mode) DVD-Video:CHP create User record quality SAP Exit Playback starts from the beginning of title 1. Notes • To stop “Play all ORG titles”, press STOP button twice. (However, do this when you are playing a title recorded in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc while recording ( page 48) will stop the recording.) Alternatively, press QUICK MENU button to display the quick menu, and press / buttons to select “Cancel play all ORG titles” and press ENTER button. • When the last title is complete, All ORG Title Play stops. • If you select “Repeat all ORG titles” at step 3), “Play all ORG titles” repeats. • This function is available only for titles recorded on HDD or DVD-RAM discs. 64 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 64 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Jumping to a specified page You can change the order or sort the titles by genres. 1) Press CONTENT MENU. CONTENT MENU appears. 1) Press CONTENT MENU. CONTENT MENU appears. 2) Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. 3) Press / to select “Display changeover”, then press ENTER. CONTENT Title List MENU Quick Menu 1 / 2 Page Edit function 2004/06/12 09:00 Special playback pm mode TV:3 Save captured images(0:52:40) Disc informationOriginal Display changeover 2004/07/12 11:00 Specific page pmjump TV:4 Title delete (0:30:08) Exit Original HDD 4) Enter the page number you want by pressing ADJUST, / or the number buttons. e.g. CONTENT Title List 1 / 2 Page MENU 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original 2006/03/24 07:00 am TV:4 (0:53:45) Original Specific 2006/06/12 09:00Page Jump pm TV:3 Page Number – – – (0:52:40) Original 2006/04/08 11:00 am TV:4 (0:30:08) Original 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original Editing To clear the number, press CLEAR button. 5) Press ENTER. The specified page appears. Notes • Some disc’s conditions or discs which contain copy once contents may not permit proper playback. • “Title resume” ( page 183) is not available. Library Network Navi 4) Press / to select the item, then press ENTER. • Arrange Titles are rearranged along with the selected order. Press / buttons to select the order, then press ENTER button. • Sort by genre Titles of the selected genre are sorted. Press / buttons to select the genre, then press ENTER button. • Sort by original Titles (Original) are sorted. • Sort by playlist Titles (Playlist) are sorted. HDD HDD : Playback HDD Title : information Arrange 2004/06/08 07:00Sort by genre Create thumbnail am TV:4 Sort by original High speed dubbing (0:53:45) Rate conversion dubbing Sort by playlist Chapter functionOriginal 3) Press / to select “Specific page jump”, then press ENTER. Recording 2) Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. e.g. Introduction Changing the order of titles Note • To cancel, select “Display changeover” then “Cancel Arrange/Narrowing” from Quick Menu. Function setup Others 65 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p059-065 65 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Playing a DVD video disc You can also play VIDEO CDs, audio CDs or finalization processed DVD-R discs in the same manner. page 60. To play recorded contents, follow the instructions on Preparation • Turn on a TV or audio system and select the corresponding input source that the recorder is connected to. page 20) • Load a disc you want to play. ( 1 Start Press DVD. DVD 2 The DVD indicator on the front panel will illuminate. This indicates that the recorder is ready to play a disc in the disc tray (DVD mode). Press PLAY. Playback starts. PLAY • Depending on a disc, playback starts automatically by loading the disc. • The recorder may take a short time to start playback. This occurs because the recorder is reading the data of a disc. Note • DVD video discs provide high resolution pictures and a lot of information. Because of this, you may notice some fine picture noises on TV screen, which you have never seen with regular broadcast TV program. While the amount of noise depends on the TV you use with the recorder, you should generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD video discs. Locating a title using the top menu DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Some DVD video discs may include a top menu, on which you can view the structure of contents or select a scene. Most of the top menus automatically appear in certain scenes, and also are displayed on demand. Actual operation of the top menu depends on a disc. This section explains a general example of how to operate a top menu. Also refer to the instructions of the disc itself. 1) Press TOP MENU. 2) Press / / / to select the title you want. If the titles in the top menu are assigned a number, you can directly locate a specific title by pressing its designated number with the number buttons. 3) Press ENTER. Notes • The instructions above describe basic procedures which may vary depending on the contents of a DVD video disc. If different instructions appear on the TV screen, follow those instructions. • If you display the top menu during playback and press TOP MENU button again without selecting any title, the recorder may resume playback from the point where you first pressed TOP MENU button. (depending on the actual DVD video disc.) • This method of locating a title is available only on a disc that contains a top menu. • Instruction notes of discs may refer to the button that displays the top menu as TITLE button. 66 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 66 06.3.22, 3:32 PM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD You can resume playback from the location where you stopped at. If you stop playback by pressing STOP button twice, the resume playback feature will be cancelled. If a disc contains several languages, you can select a preferred language from them to hear. 1) During playback, press AUDIO. Each time you press the button, output sound changes. You can display subtitles on the TV screen and select a subtitle language from those included on the disc. 1) Press SUBTITLE during playback. The current subtitle setting appears. e.g. 1 –– Off Setting number and language The language code appears instead of the language name. Refer to the list of languages and their abbreviations. ( page 195) Total number of angles Current selection Angle icon 2) Press ADJUST while the angle number is displayed on the TV screen. You can also select the camera angle by pressing ANGLE button several times. • The angle icon disappears after about 3 seconds if no further selections are made. • To turn off the angle icon Set “On screen display” in the setup menu to “Off” ( page 181). Most of the on-screen display including the angle icon will not appear. While the angle icon is flashing on the front panel display, you can change the camera angle. Notes • You can also change the camera angle during still playback. The camera angle changes to the new setting when you resume normal playback. • If you pause a picture immediately after changing a camera angle, the resumed playback picture may not display the new camera angle. • Depending on a disc, the camera angle may not change even though the angle number changes. Function setup 2) Press to select “Status,” then press ADJUST to select “On.” Skip to step 3 if “On” is already displayed. Network Navi Subtitle Status Angle 1/6 Library Selecting Subtitles e.g. Editing Selecting the sound 1) Press ANGLE while playing a scene recorded with multiple angles. While playing a scene recorded with multiple angles, the angle icon appears on the TV screen and on the front panel. Press ANGLE button while the angle icon is displayed. Playback Notes • Resume feature cannot function when: page 176) or change – you select a disc menu language ( the parental lock setting ( page 177). – you play a PBC-featured VIDEO CD. – you open the disc tray. • There may be a difference in the location where playback resumes depending on the disc. • While the recorder retains a location in memory, initial setting changes may function only after the memory is cleared. If the scene was recorded with multiple angles, you can easily change the camera angle of the scene you are watching. Recording If you press PLAY button after stopping playback, the playback resumes from the location you have stopped. Selecting the camera angle Introduction Resuming playback from the location last stopped at (Resume Play) 3) Press to select “Subtitle,” then press ADJUST to select a language. The subtitles of recorded languages appear. • To turn the subtitles on or off At step 2, select “Off” by pressing ADJUST button. Others Notes • Some DVD video discs are set to display subtitles automatically. • Depending on the scene, subtitles may not appear immediately after you set the subtitle function to on. • Some DVD video discs will allow you to change subtitle languages and turn subtitles on or off only via the disc menu. 67 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 67 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback Other playback functions Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later (Pause TV) HDD This function enables you to pause a TV broadcast and resume viewing at a later, more convenient time, by storing the TV broadcast temporarily on the HDD. 1 Start While viewing a TV broadcast via this recorder or immediately before it starts, press TIMESLIP. TIMESLIP 2 When pause TV mode is ready, playback starts automatically. The recorder begins to store the broadcast on the HDD the moment you press TIMESLIP button. Locate a scene you want by the following methods. Fast-forward/fast-reverse: Press PICTURE SEARCH button. Forward/reverse Slow-motion: Press SLOW button. Forward/reverse frame by frame play: First press PAUSE button then press FRAME button. • To resume normal playback, press PLAY button. • You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the current broadcast. 3 Press TIMESLIP to exit this mode. TIMESLIP The recorder stops storing the broadcast on the HDD. A message appears and asks you whether you will save the stored data or erase it. Press / buttons to select, then press ENTER button. Notes • This function is not available during recording. • Pause TV recording stops when the HDD is filled up. It will not begin if the HDD has no remaining space. • While using this pause TV recording, you cannot program a recording. • Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition. 68 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 68 06.3.20, 4:16 PM HDD DVD-RAM You can begin playback from the beginning of a program currently being recorded. You will find this function of great advantage on long programs, as you do not have to wait for the end of recording to begin playback. TIMESLIP The recorder displays a TV program as it is being recorded. Go back to the beginning of the TV program using SKIP. SK Playback 2 Recording 1 Start While recording a TV program on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, press TIMESLIP. Introduction Playing a TV program currently being recorded (Chase Play) IP When you go back to the beginning, playback starts automatically. You can confirm how far you are from the current broadcast by pressing TIME BAR button. Editing 3 Locate a scene you want through the following operations if necessary. Library Fast-forward/fast-reverse: Press PICTURE SEARCH button. Forward/reverse Slow-motion: Press SLOW buttons. Forward/reverse frame by frame play: First press PAUSE button then press FRAME button. • To resume normal playback, press PLAY button. • You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the current broadcast. Network Navi 4 Press TIMESLIP to exit. The current broadcast returns. TIMESLIP RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 69 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others 69 Function setup Notes • Time slip recording/playback stops when the capacity of a disc is filled up. You can play a location where the recorder stopped the recording. The time slip recording/playback cannot begin if the disc has no remaining space. • The playback picture may appear after a delay of several seconds. • The playback location will never follow up to the recorded location in the program. It will always trail the recorded location by a few seconds. • While using time slip recording/playback, you cannot program recording. • While TIMESLIP indicator is on, you cannot change the setting of the feature, which turns off the recorder after a programmed operation has finished. • Even while “Auto power off” is selected, the recorder does not turn off if the recording end time comes during playback of a program being recorded. • This function is not available on a DVD-RAM disc when “Relay recording” ( page 185) is set to “On.” • Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition. Playback Other playback functions (Continued) Zooming a picture HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD You can magnify areas within a picture. 1) Press ZOOM. A zoom scope appears. Zoom scope 2) Select a zoom point and magnification level. : Raises the magnification level. : Lowers the magnification level. / / / : Moves the zoom point. (only after the image has been magnified) CLEAR : Returns the zoom point to the center of the picture. Notes • Some discs may not respond to zoom feature. • During some scenes, the buttons may not work as described. • The zoom feature is canceled when the disc menu is operated. • The magnification level varies depending on the picture size you select ( in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). • The zoom feature is not available while displaying on the screen menu. • The zoom feature is canceled when you stop playback or start playback. page 48, To cancel the zoom Press ZOOM. Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window (P in P playback) HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD During playback, you can watch a TV broadcast in the sub window. (P in P : Picture in Picture) 1) During playback, press P in P. A sub window (program on the air or on the recording) appears. 2) Press / / / to select the position of the sub window. You can shift the sub window in following 4 directions. Notes • You can change the channel of the sub window by pressing CH / button. • The P in P function is available only during playback. • You cannot swap the playback picture with the picture within the sub window, or change the audio settings. • Press P in P button during “Chase Play” or “Pause TV”, the actual broadcast appears on the sub window in real time. • If this function is stopped after shifting the sub window, before you press P in P button again, the sub window will appear in the last position you set. ↑ / ↓ / ← / → is the moving range. To turn off the sub window, press P in P button. 70 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 70 06.3.20, 4:16 PM HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Introduction Locating by entering the number of a desired section Normally titles, chapters, and tracks are numbered. By entering these numbers, you can access a desired section. Search / Search If you are using a VIDEO CD/audio CD, skip step 2. Chapter 0001 to select a section (title or chapter) you want to locate. Playback 2) Press e.g. Recording 1) Press T.SEARCH. e.g. 001 Title When you want to locate a chapter. 001 Title Chapter 0001 3) Press the number buttons to enter a number of the section. e.g. To enter 25, press “2”, then press “5”. Library Notes • Pressing CLEAR button resets the numbers. To clear the display, press T.SEARCH button several times (depending on a disc). • This method of locating a title is available only on a disc that contains title numbers. • If a title is erased, the numbers of the following titles decrease respectively. • When you record a new title (Original) on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, it is added prior to current titles (Playlist), and each following title (Playlist) reference number will advance by a factor of 1. Editing 4) Press ENTER. Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time (Time Search) HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD e.g. Search Title Time Network Navi 1) Press T.SEARCH. You may have to press repeatedly, depending on a disc. Press the button until the following display appears. 001 00 : 00 : 00 “0” → “1” → “ ” → “2” → “5” → “ ” → “3” → “0” hour minute second Function setup 2) Press the number buttons and / to enter the desired time location on the disc. e.g. To enter 1 hour, 25 minutes, and 30 seconds 3) Press ENTER. 71 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p066-071 71 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Notes • Some discs may not respond to this process. • Some scenes may not be accessed precisely as you specified. • This method for accessing specific locations is available only within the current title of the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW/DVD video disc or within a current track of a VIDEO CD/audio CD. • Pressing CLEAR button resets the numbers. Playback Other playback functions (Continued) Selecting the sound HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD You can select a preferred language and a sound format. 1 Press AUDIO during playback or while receiving a broadcast. The current audio setting appears. AUDIO 2 The language code appears instead of the language name. Refer to the list of languages and their page 195) abbreviations. ( Press ADJUST while the audio setting is displayed on the TV screen. Variation of channels depends on the disc or the type of TV broadcast. FR AM E /A DJ US T • HDD DVD-RAM , TV channel signals Stereo sound → “Stereo” (left channel and right channel) → “Stereo L” (left channel) → “Stereo R” (right channel) (→ Back to “Stereo”) SAP sound “Main” → “SAP” → “Main + SAP” (→ Back to “Main”) DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Language name / sound recording system / No. of channels e.g. Start Sound Output 1 English PCM 2ch • VCD “Stereo” → “Stereo L” → “Stereo R” (→ Back to “Stereo”) The display turns off if you do not operate for more than 3 seconds. If you press / buttons to select “Output,” you can page 180) by using select the audio output setting ( ADJUST buttons. MTS Broadcast Compatibility This recorder can receive or record MTS (Multichannel TV sound) broadcast. By connecting the recorder to your stereo system or stereo TV, you will try the SAP or stereo sound. SAP (Second Audio Program broadcast) A separate audio program, usually broadcast in a second language with the main language. Sounds in playback You can play SAP and/or stereo broadcasts with this recorder. Refer to steps 1 and 2 to select a desired audio. Desired sound SAP sound Stereo sound Sound output SAP Stereo Sound 72 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p072-073 72 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording Notes • Some discs allow you to change audio selections only via the disc menu. If this is the case, press MENU button and choose the appropriate language from the selections on the disc menu. • When you turn on the recorder or replace a disc, the recorder returns to the initial default setting. ( page 176) Depending on a disc, a specific type of audio the disc has is output. • Immediately after you have switched sounds, there may be a temporary discrepancy between the display and actual sound. • The BITSTREAM/PCM jack may not output SAP sound you select. In this instance, set “Audio out select” to “PCM”. ( page 180) page 184) set to “Main”. Even when “DVD • You cannot change SAP sound if recorded with “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184) is set to “Off,” the recorder regards it as “Main” when recording to a DVD-R/RW disc. compatible mode” ( Recorded sounds Playback According to your setting of “SAP” on the setup menu screen, ( page 181), the sound is recorded onto different channels of the disc below. Set “SAP” to “On” or “Off” appropriately. Setting on the setup screen DVD Compatible Mode SAP Off Off Main Off SAP Off Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Dual Mono* Dual Mono* Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Network Navi On L Mono L Mono L+R Mono L Mono L Mono L Mono L+R Mono L Mono L Mono L Mono SAP SAP L Mono Type of record Library On Stereo + SAP Mono + SAP Stereo Mono Stereo + SAP Mono + SAP Stereo Mono Stereo + SAP Mono + SAP Stereo Mono Stereo + SAP Mono + SAP Stereo Mono Stereo + SAP Mono + SAP Stereo Mono Stereo + SAP Mono + SAP Stereo Mono Contents of recorded sound Lch Rch R Mono R Mono SAP SAP R Mono R Mono R Mono L+R Mono R Mono R Mono R Mono SAP SAP R Mono Editing On Type of receiving broadcast * This will be “Stereo” when a recording is made with “L-PCM” selected. Function setup Others 73 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p072-073 73 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback Other playback functions (Continued) Viewing JPEG files You can play JPEG files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on the recorder. Preparations • Prepare a compatible disc ( page 75) that contains JPEG files you want to view. page 183) to “Photo”. • Set “Priority contents” ( • Make your TV shape conform to the 4:3 picture size. Only 4:3 pictures can be played regardless of the function settings via the on-screen displays of the recorder ( page 48, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). If the TV is adjusted to other sizes, e.g. “WIDE,” images will appear to be horizontally expanded. For details, refer to the owner’s manual of your TV. 1 Press DVD. DVD 2 Start Load a CD that contains JPEG files. Each photo appears for about 3 seconds (slide show). OPEN/CLOSE If a slide show does not start, press PLAY button. Depending on the disc, “CONTENT MENU Picture List” appears. See “On “CONTENT MENU Picture List”” ( page 75) to operate. Notes • Some files may not display their own entire images depending on the size. • JPEG picture playback is not available during recording on the HDD. • Operation to JPEG file will be disabled at about 2 minutes before a programmed recording starts. To stop playback (slide show) To rotate a picture Press STOP. If you press PLAY button after pressing STOP button, playback will start from the photo you stopped at. Press ANGLE repeatedly. Each time you press the button, the picture rotates by 90° degree. To pause playback (slide show) Press PAUSE. To resume, press PAUSE button again or press PLAY button. Note • The rotated image is displayed after its original posture appears momentarily. To magnify a picture Follow the procedure on To skip photos During playback, press SKIP button repeatedly. : To skip forward. : To skip backward. Notes • The magnified image is displayed after its original posture appears momentarily. • For small pictures, the reduction level may be limited. 74 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 74 page 70. 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Direct input of a photo number Viewing a specified photo (single view) Full screen still view. 2 ways are available: On “CONTENT MENU Picture List” e.g. 1) Press CONTENT MENU. “CONTENT MENU Picture List” appears. Search “Auto”: For CD of which compatibility confirmed by TOSHIBA. Only playable files are listed. CONTENT Picture List MENU DH100001 002 DH100002 003 DH100001 004 007 010 013 DH100004 DH100003 DH100006 DH100009 number 005 008 011 014 DH100001 DH100004 DH100007 DH100010 006 009 012 015 DH100002 DH100005 DH100008 DH100011 To change the playback order 1) Press QUICK MENU. For CD other than above. All files are listed. CONTENT Picture List MENU CD 1 / 3 Page 001 DH100001 002 DH100002 003 DH100001 004 007 DH100004 DH100003 005 008 DH100001 DH100004 006 009 DH100002 DH100005 • Some CDs may not comply with the above. button, the list changes to thumbnail If you press view (“CONTENT MENU Pictures”). CONTENT Picturs MENU // CD 1 / 8 Page JPEG To return to the previous list, press button again. The selected photo appears in full screen. 3) Press ENTER. Playback in the selected mode starts. JPEG files compatibility Discs whose compatibility with this recorder has been confirmed by TOSHIBA are as follows. CANON QuickCD FUJICOLOR CD Kodak Picture CD NORITSU QSS CD JPEG disc compatibility with this recorder is limited as follows: • Playable discs: CD-ROM, CD-R CD-RW is not recommendable. • CD physical format: Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1 • File system: ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet • File name: A file name should be in alphabet and numerals only, and must incorporate “JPG” extension. e.g.“********.JPG” • Total number of folders: Less than 256 • Total number of files: Less than 1000 Some files may not display their own entire image depending on the size. Some discs may not permit this operation. Especially, the following conditions of included files will increase the disc’s disability. 1. Pixels over 5000 x 5000 in height and/or width 2. File format except Exif 75 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 75 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Notes • “CONTENT MENU Picture List” cannot show all the files in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of regular play of the disc. • The larger the file size is, the longer the thumbnail takes time to appear. • Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space are not displayed. : To repeat the current folder. Function setup 3) Press ENTER. If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and 3) until your favorite file appears. : To reverse the order. Network Navi Pressing ANGLE button rotates the picture. The rotation of pictures is kept until the CD is ejected. Reverse Repeat Library 2) Press / / / to select a folder or photo. / ) button turns Pressing PICTURE SEARCH ( the pages. 2) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER. To shift the cursor, press / buttons. Editing All e.g. 2) Input a photo number using the number buttons or ADJUST. 3) Press ENTER. The selected photo appears in full screen. Playback 001 File 016 017 018 DH100012 DH100013 DH100014 If you select this icon and press the ENTER button, 019 020 021 DH100015 DH100016 DH100017 upper folders appear. 022 023 024 DH100018 DH100019 DH100020 e.g. 001 CD 1 / 3 Page Auto “All”: Photo Recording Depending on the disc, the recorder creates either temporary folder, “Auto” or “All”. e.g. Introduction 1) Press T.SEARCH. An input window appears. Playback Other playback functions (Continued) Playing MP3/WMA files You can play MP3/WMA files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on this recorder. Preparations • Make sure that a disc you want to play is compatible with this recorder. See page 183) to “Audio”. • Set “Priority contents” ( 1 page 77. Press DVD. DVD 2 Start Load a CD that contains MP3/WMA files. Playback starts from the first track of a current folder. OPEN/CLOSE Notes • WMA tracks copy-protected cannot be played. • The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT BITSTREAM/PCM jack outputs MP3/WMA sounds in the linear PCM format regardless of the current “Audio out select” ( page 180) selection. • You cannot change the playback speed of MP3/WMA playback. To stop playback On “CONTENT MENU Audio List” Press STOP. If you press PLAY button after pressing STOP button, playback will start from the beginning of the track. 1) Press CONTENT MENU button. “CONTENT MENU Audio List” appears. Current folder e.g. To pause playback CONTENT Audio List MENU CD 1 / 1 Page MP3 Press PAUSE. To resume, press PAUSE button again or press PLAY button. MP3_0001 002 MP3_0002 003 MP3_0003 004 007 010 MP3_0004 MP3_0007 MP3_0010 005 008 011 MP3_0005 MP3_0008 MP3_0011 006 009 012 MP3_0006 MP3_0009 MP3_0012 File number If you select this icon and press ENTER button, upper folders appear. To skip tracks During playback, press SKIP repeatedly. : To skip forward. : To skip backward. 001 e.g. CONTENT Audio List MENU CD 1 / 1 Page All JPG_MP3 MP3 Selecting a track in the disc 2 ways are available: 003 MP3c MP3_0003 Disc name MP3a 001 004 76 MP3b 002 MP3_0002 The recorder creates temporary folder “All”, which contains all playable files. 76 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 MP3_0001 MP3_0004 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Notes • “CONTENT MENU Audio List” cannot show all the tracks in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of proper play of the disc. • Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space are not displayed. 1) Press T.SEARCH. An input window appears. e.g. Search Track 001 * This recorder supports ID3v2 (ID3 Tag Version 2) of MP3, to display text data such as names of title and artist. Some characters may be displayed properly. 1) Press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”, then press ENTER. e.g. Memory Memory list Folder repeat Track repeat Track random To shift the cursor, press / buttons. Others Folder repeat : To repeat the current folder. Track repeat : To repeat the current file. Track random : To play files in the current folder in a random order. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Note • To cancel these modes, stop the playback or select the cancel command from Quick Menu. 77 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p074-077 77 Function setup 3) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER. Memory list : To play favorite tracks only in a favorite order. Input a track number by using the number buttons or ADJUST button. Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content, including music files, in any format, including the MP3 and WMA formats, prior to the downloading thereof. Toshiba has no right to grant and does not grant permission to download any copyrighted content. Network Navi Quick Menu This HDD/DVD Recorder requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality. There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA files). Not all recordable discs will operate or produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner's manual are meant only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended. Library To change the playback order Special playback mode Exit Editing 2) Input a track number using the number buttons or ADJUST button. 3) Press ENTER. Playback Direct input of a track number MP3/WMA disc compatibility with this recorder is limited as follows: • Playable discs: CD-ROM, CD-R CD-RW is not recommendable. • Sampling Frequency / Bitrate: WMA: 32 kHz / 48 kbps (CBR), VBR 44.1 kHz / 48-192 kbps (CBR), VBR 48 kHz / 128-192 kbps (CBR), VBR MP3: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz / 8-160 kbps (CBR), VBR 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz / 32-320 kbps (CBR), VBR • CD physical format: Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1 • File system: ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet • File name: A file name should be in alphabet and numerals only, and must incorporate “MP3” or “WMA” extension. e.g.“********.MP3”, “********.WMA” • Total number of folders: Less than 256 • Total number of files: Less than 1000 • WMA codec version: V7, V8, V9 Recording 3) Press ENTER. If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and 3) until your favorite file appears. Playable files Introduction 2) Press / / / to select a track or folder. / ) button Pressing PICTURE SEARCH ( turns the pages. 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback Other playback functions (Continued) Checking the current status and settings HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD You can confirm operational status and setting details. Operational status and setting details 1 Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY The following on-screen display appears. (The actual display varies depending on the disc.) e.g. while playing the HDD Mode indicator Elapsed time of a title/ Elapsed time of a chapter Title No./ Chapter No. Operating disc Receiving channel HDMI signal resolution Playback mode Status display e.g. 2 Title 002 : 00 : 10 : 29 Chapter 0005 : 00 : 05: 15 Title repeat HDD 3 Stereo 1080i Press DISPLAY again. An expanded display appears. (Actual display varies depending on the disc.) DISPLAY e.g. Remaining time Title 002: -00:22:01 Chapter 0005: -00:00:07 Virtual surround DNR (Recording) Picture Quality Audio Quality Audio Audio Output Subtitle : : : : : : : Title repeat HDD 3 Stereo ––– Off Off SP D/M1 1 Stereo R Original Bitstream – – – Off Start 3 Press DISPLAY again to turn the display off. DISPLAY 78 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 78 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Using the time bar The time bar shows the current progress in playback or recording. Recording 1 During playback or recording, press TIME BAR. The time bar appears. (The actual display varies depending on the disc.) TIME BAR e.g. Playback Location 00 : 55 : 00:00F Chapter division Elapsed time Start Total playing time of a current title (In the case of a VIDEO CD or audio CD, it shows the total playing time of the disc.) Locator (Shows the current location.) 00 : 18 : 00 00 : 00 : 00 Location 00 : 30 : 00 Elapsed time Elapsed recording time (per 30 minutes) (Recording end time if it comes within 30 minutes.) Library Note • Time display is an approximation. 01 : 30 : 00 Editing e.g. Recording Playback 00 : 00 : 00 Locator (Shows the current location.) Changing the location of the time bar / . Network Navi While the time bar is displayed, press The time bar shifts up and down. Turning off the time bar Press TIME BAR. Function setup Others 79 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 79 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Playback Other playback functions (Continued) Functions in Quick Menu Besides these examples, various other ones are introduced on respective pages for your convenience. See page 30 on how to operate Quick Menu. Repeat all PL titles To play repeatedly (Repeat playback) HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD You can repeat a desired section. 1) During playback, press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”, then press ENTER. Special playback mode The sub menu appears. Select the next item by pressing / buttons and ENTER button. Repeat all ORG titles To repeat all original titles in a disc. Title repeat To repeat the same title. Notes • Some discs may not permit repeat operation. • You cannot use the repeat playback function in conjunction with the random playback function. • If you press STOP button during repeat playback, this operation is canceled. • While you are performing repeat playback on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, other operations ( page 62) except stopping this operation are not available. DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO To repeat the same chapter. VCD CD You can play sections in random order. A-B repeat You can designate a portion in a title or track to repeat continuously. If you select “A-B repeat” and press ENTER button, the following display appears. Perform steps 1 and 2 below. e.g. A B Cancel repeat (in Repeat playback mode) To resume normal playback. Playback of the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc stops. To play in random order (Random play) Chapter repeat repeat To repeat all playlist titles in a disc. Set A 1) Press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”, then press ENTER. Special playback mode The sub menu appears. Select the next item by pressing / buttons and ENTER button. Title random Plays all titles in a loaded disc in random order. Each title is played beginning from chapter 1. Chapter random To cancel the procedure, press button. 1) Press ENTER at the beginning of the segment (point A) you want to repeat. The location of point A is memorized. The display changes to “Set B”. Plays all chapters in a current title in random order. Track random Plays all tracks on a loaded disc in random order. 2) Press ENTER at the end of the segment (point B). The location of point B is memorized, and repeat playback begins between point A and B. Track repeat To repeat the same track. Disc repeat To repeat the entire disc. 80 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 80 06.3.20, 4:16 PM (in Random play mode) DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD You can select 30 titles, chapters, or tracks and play them in favorite order. (To play contents in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc in favorite order, make a playlist. For details, see page 84.) “Editing” on Special playback mode The sub menu appears. Select the next item by pressing / buttons and ENTER button. e.g. CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 T T T T T T T T T T CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 T T T T T T T T T T CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT Memory repeat (in memory playback mode) To repeat a current memory playback. Notes • Some discs may not permit memory playback operation. • Inputting numbers of titles, chapters or tracks that a disc does not contain will result in error. • You cannot program/change selections during memory playback. To change selections, cancel memory playback by pressing STOP button. • When you disconnect the power cord, the selected memory is erased. • You can exit the memory playback display by pressing O button. To display the current bit rate HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Network Navi T T T T T T T T T T (in memory playback 1) During playback, press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / ENTER. to select “Bit rate”, then press Bit rate Function setup Note • To turn off the bit rate display, select this item again. To check information on a title HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R 1) During playback, press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Title information”, then press ENTER. Title information To exit Quick Menu HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD Others 1) Input numbers of titles, chapters, or tracks by using the number buttons, in favorite order. Input each 3-digit number. To input a 1- or 2-digit number, first input 0. (e.g. “0”, “0”, “3”.) To cancel the numbers, press CLEAR button. To input a chapter number, press / buttons to shift the cursor. CD Press QUICK MENU again. or Press / to select “Exit”, then press ENTER. Exit 81 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 81 Library Memory list If you select this and press ENTER button, the following display appears. Perform the steps below. Memory release mode) To resume normal playback. Editing 1) Press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”, then press ENTER. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Memory (in normal playback mode) To display an entry box for one program selection. Playback To play in favorite order (Memory playback) 3) Press ENTER. Memory playback starts. Recording Notes • Some discs may not permit random playback operation. • You cannot use the random playback function in conjunction with the memory playback function. • You cannot use the random playback function in conjunction with the repeat playback function. • Pressing STOP button during operation cancels random playback. 2) Press / to select the next box, then perform step 1). To select another chapter in the same title, you do not need to select the title number. Repeat these steps if necessary. You can program up to 30 selections into memory. Introduction Cancel random Resumes normal playback. 06.3.20, 4:16 PM RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p078-082 82 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing You can create your own movie from your assembled scenes. Save your favorite videos in DVD discs. Creating your own title Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW DVD-Video finalizing process Other editing functions RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 83 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title You can edit recorded contents and create your own library. Note on deleting unnecessary scenes It is not recommended that you delete many chapters from titles recorded on the HDD to remove unnecessary parts of the titles and copy those contents on a DVD-RAM disc. The reason is that discontinuous space inside the HDD expands and recorded contents are stored in gaps between used locations. Operating this repeatedly makes a recording area inside the HDD broken down into small and complicated spaces. (It is called fragmentation.) Even normal operations may get slow. Moreover, available space may not be restored by deleting or the HDD may have protection disabling playback or recording. When you want to delete unnecessary parts from titles, collect necessary parts of chapters to make a playlist. Then copy the playlist and delete the original title or the playlist. For example, make a playlist and copy it to a DVDRAM. Then delete original titles on the HDD. It can save time and effort and retain continuity in the HDD space. However, when moving a copy once program from the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc, delete unnecessary chapters page 98). from original titles. For details ( Running “All HDD titles delete” regularly prevents fragmentation from occurring. In addition, if you select and run “HDD format”, all data on the HDD will be erased. Copy TV programs you want to save recorded on the HDD from the HDD to a DVD-RAM or DVD-R/RW disc. When it comes to library data, back it up to a DVD-RAM disc before initializing the HDD. Then rewrite the data on the HDD. Editing procedure 1: 2: 3: 4: Changing a name of a recorded title ( page 86) Dividing a recorded title into several chapters ( page 87) Collecting necessary chapters ( page 92) Dubbing to save To save in DVD-R/RW for distribution, see ( page 97) Other editing functions Changing the picture on CONTENT MENU Combining two titles (Original) into one page 112. ( ( page 126) page 128) 84 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 84 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Basic flow Recording a TV program Record a TV program and it becomes a original title. e.g. Title: The world of cats and dogs. Recording Playlist editing Collect your favorite chapters to make them as one title. (Playlist) If an original title is deleted, a playlist will be also deleted because playlists are fictitious titles. e.g. Making a playlist by collecting scenes of cats from title 1 “The world of cats and dogs”. Playback Title 1: “The world of cats and dogs” (Original) Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter editing Editing Divide the original title into chapters. Playlist Editing Title 1: “The world of cats and dogs” (Original) Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Library Title 1: “Cat’s world” (Playlist) Divide chapters and create divisions of chapter A fictitious playlist title that is different from the original title is created. Network Navi • You can play desired scenes from the top by “Chapter Divide”. • Divide chapters to edit a playlist. Dubbing Function setup Copy the playlist and it becomes an original title. Using these editing functions to modify copyrighted content for any purpose other than your private viewing may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Others 85 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 85 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title (Continued) 1: Changing a name of a recorded title 1 2 HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW Press CONTENT MENU, then press to select a title. / / / Press QUICK MENU then select “Title information” by pressing / from the Quick Menu, then press ENTER. Start “CONTENT MENU Title information” appears. QUICK MENU e.g. CONTENT Title information MENU Title : 006 3CH 2006 3/26(Su) 2006/03/26 10:00pm TV:3 ENTER 3 HDD Media : Quality : X P Mode : L P Rate : 2. 2 Audio : D/ M1 DVD Mode : Off 10:00 pm (2:06:32) Documentary/Culture(General) Original Chapter : 0001 (0:04:15) Press QUICK MENU then select “Edit title name” or “Edit chapter name” by pressing / from the Quick Menu, then press ENTER. The character entry screen appears. QUICK MENU • To change a title name or chapter name, see the steps on page 36. ENTER 86 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 86 06.3.20, 4:16 PM HDD DVD-RAM 1 title is created by recording at a time, which includes 1 chapter. By dividing it into several chapters, it will be easier to access a desired scene, and your editing or playback will be much easier. Playback Notes • Chapters cannot be created in the following modes: Dubbing / Fast-reverse, Fast-forward / Slow-motion • You cannot divide a title of a DVD-R/RW disc into chapters. It is possible to create chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc by pressing CHP DIVIDE button while recording at the desired points, or by selecting an option that inserts chapter marks automatically while recording at regular intervals. ( page 185) Recording Simple method To create chapters in a title, insert a chapter mark. Playback the contents, locate a point where you want to divide, then press CHP DIVIDE button. You can insert a chapter mark also while recording, by pressing CHP DIVIDE button. (A chapter will also be placed in the recording when you pause.) The point divides the chapter (into two). You can create multiple chapters by repeating the above operation. Introduction 2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters Precise method If you want to modify the chapter division, or want to place a chapter mark more precisely monitoring the frame counter, follow the procedures below. 2 Press QUICK MENU. / Quick Menu appears. e.g. CONTENT Title List MENU Quick Menu 1 / 2 Page Network Navi QUICK MENU / Library 1 / Editing Start Press CONTENT MENU, then press to select a title. HDD 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original Edit function 2004/06/12 09:00 Special playback pm mode TV:3 Save captured images(0:52:40) Disc informationOriginal Display changeover 2004/07/12 11:00 Specific page pmjump TV:4 Title delete (0:30:08) Exit Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original Function setup HDD Title : information 2004/06/08 07:00 Create thumbnail am TV:4 High speed dubbing (0:53:45) Rate conversion dubbing Chapter functionOriginal Others (Continued) 87 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 87 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters (Continued) 3 Press / to select “Chapter function”, then press ENTER. The submenu appears. e.g. ENTER CONTENT Title List MENU Quick Menu 1 / 2 Page HDD HDD Title : information Chapter editing 2004/06/08 07:00 Create thumbnail Auto chapter create2006/03/24 11:00 am TV:4 pm TV:6 High speed dubbing (0:29:50) (0:53:45) Rate conversion dubbing Original Chapter functionOriginal Edit function 2004/06/12 09:00 Special playback pm mode TV:3 Save captured images(0:52:40) Disc informationOriginal Display changeover 2004/07/12 11:00 Specific page pmjump TV:4 Title delete (0:30:08) Exit Original 4 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original Press / to select “Chapter editing”, then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Chapter Editing” appears. e.g. ENTER EDIT MENU HDD Chapter Editing Fishing Guide Original Aspect Ratio 4:3 Location 00:00:00:03F Divide To create new chapter, select desired start point via remote. To set, press enter. Title:004 00:00:00 Chapter:0001 00:54:30 B 5 Press PLAY to start playback. Locate a scene where you want to insert a chapter mark. PLAY You can use the following buttons. PICTURE SEARCH, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE, FRAME/ADJUST, etc. The locator shows the current position on the time bar. And the live video plays in the upper left. • To access other chapters: Press / buttons to move to the thumbnail display, then press / buttons to select a desired thumbnail. To go to the next page, press PICTURE SEARCH button. • You can confirm the first and last scenes of a chapter. Select a thumbnail and press ENTER button. 3 seconds of the first and last scenes are played. 88 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 88 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording 6 At a point where you want to make a chapter division, press PAUSE. The picture pauses. PAUSE e.g. EDIT MENU HDD Chapter Editing Fishing Guide Original Aspect Ratio 4:3 Title:004 00:00:00 Chapter:0001 Playback Location 00:00:21:24F Divide To create new chapter, select desired start point via remote. To set, press enter. 00:54:30 B ENTER / / to select “Divide,” then press Editing 7 Press / ENTER. A chapter division is created at the selected location, and the first scene of the new chapter is registered as a chapter thumbnail. e.g. EDIT MENU HDD Chapter Editing Fishing Guide Library Original Aspect Ratio 4:3 Location 00:00:21:24F Divide To create new chapter, select desired start point via remote. To set, press enter. Title:004 00:00:00 Chapter:0001 00:54:30 Network Navi B 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7. Locations of chapter division are indicated by the markers on the time bar. 9 Function setup To erase a chapter division, see “Merging chapters” ( page 91). When all chapter divisions have been made, press . The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the chapter divisions on the time bar. Others When complete, CONTENT MENU is displayed. 89 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 89 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 2: Dividing a recorded title into several chapters (Continued) Notes • This recorder supports a limited number of chapters on a disc. If exceeded, a message appears. In this event, reduce the number of chapters by merging chapters. ( page 91) • “EDIT MENU Chapter Editing” can also be viewed by selecting “Chapter Editing” from “EDIT MENU Main Menu”. e.g. EDIT HDD Main Menu MENU Chapter Editing Chapters can be divided on frame basis. Chapters can be merged and assigned names. Edit Functions Title 1 Merge Divide 1 Source DV Recording Chapter Editing 2 3 4 5 Playlist Editing Dub Selected Items Rate Conv. Items Combine ORG Title DVD-Video Creation DVD-Video Finalizing Del Selected Items • To exit “EDIT MENU Main Menu”, press EDIT MENU button. • Making chapters in a title (Original) does not affect the related titles (Playlist). • There may be a small difference between a location you marked and a chapter division actually played. • Pausing a recording automatically creates a chapter division. page 56), a chapter division is • During relay recording ( automatically created at the start point of relay record. • If you create chapters in a title which is stored in the HDD and copy the title to a DVD-R/RW, the chapter divisions may shift. Creating chapters automatically when recording You can create chapter marks from the beginning of a title at regular intervals automatically. (Chapter marks are added to those already existing.) This is convenient for long programs, such as live sports games. 1) Perform steps 1 to 4 on pages 87 to 88. 2) Press / to select “Auto chapter create”, then press ENTER. 3) Press / to select a chapter division interval, then press ENTER. Chapter divisions are automatically marked at the selected intervals. Editing chapter break You can adjust positions of chapter marks. You can shift the beginning of a chapter currently selected. page 87 to 88. 1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on 2) Press QUICK MENU. 3) Press / to select “Chapter break edit mode”, then press ENTER. 4) Press / ENTER. to select the item, then press “by frame (VR mode)” The chapter mark shifts by one frame. For contents which will be copied to DVD-RAM discs. “by GOP (Video mode)” The chapter mark shifts by a GOP (about 0.5 second), which is a unit of editing in DVD-Video format. For contents which will be copied to DVD-R/RW. 5) Press / to select a chapter whose beginning you want to shift. 6) Press FRAME (II / II) repeatedly until a desired scene appears. Select a point while monitoring the thumbnail, which changes as you press the button. To operate other chapters, press / buttons to select another, then follow the above steps. 7) When complete, press QUICK MENU, and select “Chapter break edit mode off (by frame)” or “Chapter Break Edit Mode off (by GOP)” then press ENTER. The recorder exits the adjusting mode. Notes • You cannot shift a chapter mark beyond the adjacent chapter marks or a logical gap on recorded data within a chapter. • Shifting a chapter mark restores a thumbnail to the beginning of a chapter. This may occur also on the previous chapter depending on the data condition. 90 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 90 06.3.20, 4:16 PM 1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on pages 87 to 88, to view the EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display. 3) Press QUICK MENU. e.g. EDIT MENU Chapter Create HDD Quick Menu Chapter break edit mode 2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3 Original Aspect Ratio 4:3 Location 00:00:00:03F Divide To create new chapter, select desired start point via remote. To set, press enter. Merge all chapters Auto chapter create Edit chapter name Exit 00:54:30 Title: 002 Chapter: 0004 B Merge with following cptr: To delete the chapter division between the selected chapter and the succeeding one. 5) Press ENTER. 3) Press / / / to select “Edit Chapter Name”, then press ENTER. A keyboard appears. Enter a name following the on-screen icon guides. Notes • There is a limit to the number of chapters which can be named. If exceeded, a message appears. • You can also access the keyboard to enter a chapter name by selecting a chapter with PICTURE SEARCH button on CONTENT MENU Title Information, and by selecting “Edit chapter name” from the Quick Menu on CONTENT MENU Chapter List. • You can change chapter names also on a DVD-R/RW disc, if the disc is not finalized yet. e.g. EDIT MENU Chapter Editing Network Navi e.g. When “Merge with previous cptr” is selected: The selected chapter is merged into the previous chapter and its thumbnail is erased. HDD 2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3 Original Aspect Ratio 4:3 Location 00:00:00:03F Divide To create new chapter, select desired start point via remote. To set, press enter. Title: 002 Chapter: 0004 Function setup 00:00:00 Library Merge all chapters: To merge all chapters in the title. 1) From EDIT MENU Chapter Editing, select a chapter which you want to name. 2) Press QUICK MENU. Editing 4) Press / to select an item. Merge with previous cptr: To delete the chapter division between the selected chapter and the previous one. Naming a chapter Playback Merge with previous cptr Merge with following cptr 00:00:00 Recording 2) Press / / / to highlight a chapter. Pressing PICTURE SEARCH button can access preceding or following pages. Notes • To turn off “EDIT MENU Main Menu”, press EDIT MENU button. • When chapters are merged, the numerical value of following chapters will decrease correspondingly. • Merging chapters does not affect the related titles (Playlist). You can also merge chapters in the title (Playlist). In this case, the title (Original) is not affected. • You can access the feature of merging chapters also from Quick Menu on CONTENT MENU Chapter List. Introduction Merging chapters 00:54:30 B Others 91 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p083-091 91 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title (Continued) 3: Collecting necessary scenes HDD DVD-RAM Create a “Playlist” to omit unnecessary scenes for dubbing, or compile desired scenes. 1 Press CONTENT MENU. “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears. CONTENT MENU Start 2 Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. QUICK MENU 3 Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives. e.g. CONTENT Title List MENU Quick Menu 1 / 2 Page HDD HDD Title : information 2004/06/08 07:00 Create thumbnail am TV:4 High speed dubbing (0:53:45) Rate conversion dubbing Chapter functionOriginal 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original Edit function 2004/06/12 09:00 Special playback pm mode TV:3 Save captured images(0:52:40) Disc informationOriginal Display changeover 2004/07/12 11:00 Specific page pmjump TV:4 Title delete (0:30:08) Exit Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original Press / to select “Edit function”, then press ENTER. Submenu appears. e.g. ENTER CONTENT Title List MENU Quick Menu 1 / 2 Page Edit function 2004/06/12 09:00 Special playback pm mode TV:3 Save captured images(0:52:40) Disc informationOriginal Display changeover 2004/07/12 11:00 Specific page pmjump TV:4 Title delete (0:30:08) Exit Original 92 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 92 HDD HDD Title : information Playlist editing 2004/06/08 07:00Original title combination 2004/06/24 11:00 Create thumbnail am TV:4 pm TV:6 High speed dubbing Playlist(Mon-Fri) (0:53:45) Playlist(everyweek) (0:29:50) Rate conversion dubbing Original Chapter functionOriginal 06.3.20, 4:16 PM 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original Introduction Recording 4 Press / to select “Playlist editing”, then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Playlist editing” appears. e.g. EDIT Playlist Editing HDD MENU ENTER / Start to select a title or chapter. e.g. EDIT Playlist Editing HDD MENU button. Original Object :Title PlayList Library Source:Title Entire Time: Title: Editing To select between titles and chapters, press ENTER Start A B Network Navi 6 PlayList Playback 5 / Object :Title A B / Original Entire Time: Title: Press Source:Title Press ENTER. A cursor appears, indicating the point where the selected item will be inserted. e.g. EDIT Playlist Editing HDD MENU Source:Title Original Object :Title PlayList Function setup ENTER Cursor B Start Others Entire Time: Title: A (Continued) 93 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 93 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 3: Collecting necessary scenes (Continued) 7 Press / to select a point where you want to insert the item, then press ENTER. If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor to the left and press ENTER button. ENTER The selected part is inserted at the location of the cursor. e.g. EDIT Playlist Editing HDD MENU Title: 2006/05/07 10:30am B Source:Title Original Object :Title PlayList Entire Time: 00:13:45 Start A 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to insert items. 9 When all items have been inserted, press . To cancel the selection, see “Canceling selection of a part” page 95). ( The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the Playlist. When completed, CONTENT MENU is displayed. Notes • You can access “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” also by selecting “Playlist editing” on EDIT MENU. • If you delete titles and chapters (Original), the corresponding titles and chapters (Playlist) are also deleted. Contrarily, if you delete titles and chapters (Playlist), the corresponding titles and chapters (Original) are not deleted. • Playback may pause if a gap between the content is played. • There may be a small difference between the chapter boundary and the actual playback picture. • A title or chapter which is being edited cannot be selected as an item. • You cannot add a title of still pictures, or a title or a chapter which contains both still and moving pictures, to a playlist. • By copying (dubbing) a Playlist, a title (Original) of the same contents is created. • You cannot program a Playlist of contents recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc. • Down arrow on the thumbnails means: Orange: This title already selected. Green trimmed: Some chapters in this title already selected. Green: This chapter already selected. • A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 10 seconds. This thumbnail cannot start playback. 94 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 94 06.3.20, 4:16 PM 1) From EDIT MENU Playlist editing, press / / / to select a part to cancel. Introduction Canceling selection of a part Note • You cannot edit a title (Playlist) of still pictures, or a title (Playlist) which contains both still and moving pictures. 3) Press / to select “Cancel selected title”, then press ENTER. The part you have selected is canceled. 1) Press EDIT MENU. “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears. 2) Press / / / to select “Playlist editing,” then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Playlist editing” appears. You can play the first and last 3 seconds of a scene (Preview). (If a title contains several chapters, the first and last scenes of the chapters are also played.) 3) Press / / / to select “Start” then press ENTER. The areas of title name and part selection become blank. Preview of a part: 4) Following the procedures outlined on 93, make a Playlist. 1) At step 5 on page 93, select a title or a chapter, then press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Preview”, then press ENTER. Naming a title (Playlist) 2) Press / to select “Preview all playlists”, then press ENTER. 1) From EDIT MENU Playlist editing, move a cursor to the lower side (selected parts) then press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Edit title name,” then press ENTER. A keyboard appears. 3) Following the procedures outlined on 36, enter a title name. 1) At step 5 on page 93, select a title or a chapter, then press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Title information” then press ENTER. page Note • You can name a title also while viewing its information. From “CONTENT MENU Title List”, select a title and press QUICK MENU button then select “Title Information” by / buttons and ENTER button. Further press QUICK MENU button, and select “Edit title name” by / buttons and ENTER button. Function setup Correcting a Playlist You can add or delete parts to correct a Playlist. 1) From CONTENT MENU, select a playlist to correct. 2) Press QUICK MENU. Others 3) Press / to select “Playlist re-editing” and then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Playlist editing” appears. Follow the procedure from steps 5 on add or delete parts as necessary. page 93, 95 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 95 Network Navi Confirming the title information Library 1) Move the cursor to an any part (in the lower area), then press QUICK MENU button. page Editing Preview of all parts: Playback Confirming the first and last scenes of a part or a Playlist Using a part in a Playlist also in another Playlist Recording 2) Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 3: Collecting necessary scenes (Continued) Making a Playlist of recorded contents where starting times are the same (i.e. daily or weekly recordings) This will help to sort serials. 1) From “CONTENT MENU Title List”, press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Edit function”, then press ENTER. 3) Press / to select the item. “Playlist(Mon-Fri)” To sort out programs recorded on the same time on Monday to Friday to make a Playlist. “Playlist(every week)” To sort out programs recorded on the same time of the same day of the week to make a Playlist. 4) Press ENTER. Notes • Only titles (Original) can be sorted. • The maximum number of sorted titles on a DVD-RAM disc is 99. • If you modify the recording start time or date of one of the recorded serials, the title will not be sorted out. Contrarily, any program can be sorted if its channel, recording start time and date are modified as the same as others. • “Playlist(Mon-Fri)” can sort titles even if they are not complete 5 collections of Monday to Friday, on the condition that they have the same channel and recording start time, and exclude Saturday and Sunday. 96 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p092-096 96 06.3.20, 4:16 PM You can dub (copy or move) contents recorded in the HDD or DVD-RAM/R/RW, between HDD and DVD-RAM drive or within the same drives. Learn about dubbing on this recorder to select the best method. Recording Purpose Operation A: High speed dubbing Dubbing a title reducing its data size B: Rate conversion dubbing ( page 106) Dubbing a title which is being played C: Line-U dubbing page 110) Dubbing titles recorded on the HDD to DVD-R/RW for distribution to DVD player users Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW ( page 112) Converting a title (Playlist) into a title (Original) A: High speed dubbing You can copy recorded contents without changing the picture and sound quality. Use this function on the purposes such as the followings: – when you copy a whole title to a DVD-RAM/R/ RW disc. High speed dubbing of several contents - “Dub selected items” You can select titles and chapters and copy them all at once. Use this function on the purposes such as the followings: C: Line-U dubbing You can record pictures recorded which is being played. Use this function when you want to copy contents in DVD-R/RW recorded on other device, which cannot show thumbnails in “CONTENT MENU Title List”, to the HDD. All the above functions can copy data as original digital signals. “Rate conversion dubbing” and “LineU dubbing”, however, needs data processing and may deteriorate the original picture and sound quality. Also, it is not possible to improve the picture and sound quality by the Rate conversion dubbing at increased bit rate. 97 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 97 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others – When you have recorded a content on the HDD at a high rate, and you cannot copy it to a DVDRAM disc because the data size is too large. (→ Reduce the data size.) Use this function when you unify the compatibility of several titles and contents all at once. Function setup B: Rate conversion dubbing You can copy content and change its data size from the original recording. Rate conversion dubbing of several parts You can select titles and chapters and change the data size and copy them all at once. Network Navi – when you convert a Playlist into an Original title (produce an Original title from a Playlist) – When you recorded a content while “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184) was set to “Off”, and you cannot copy it to a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video format; or when a DVD-RAM disc was recorded with the other equipment which is not compatible with this recorder’s recording format, and you want to copy it to a DVD-R/RW (→ Set “DVD compatible mode” to “Main” or “SAP”.) Library “High speed” means the dubbing time is shorter than the actual time of the content. ( Editing page 100) Playback ( Dubbing a whole title or a chapter Introduction 4: Dubbing to save Editing Creating your own title – 4: Dubbing to save (Continued) High speed Library dubbing of several parts Rate conversion dubbing Rate conversion dubbing of several parts Line-U dubbing To High speed Library dubbing HDD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DVD-RAM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DVD-R/RW (Not finalized yet) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes HDD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DVD-RAM Yes Yes No No No HDD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DVD-R/RW No No No No No From HDD DVD-RAM DVD-R/RW • • • • It is not possible to copy to a DVD-R/RW of DVD-VR mode. “High speed dubbing” between the HDD and a DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment is not possible. “High speed dubbing” to a finalized DVD-R/RW is not possible. “Line-U dubbing” using a DVD-R/RW which was recorded on other equipment and is not finalized yet is not possible. “Copy” and “Move” This recorder’s “Dubbing” has the following two definitions: Copy: The original program remains after the operation is completed. Move: The moved program will be erased from the original location after the operation is completed. Whether or not you select either command depends entirely on the given situation. The command may be predetermined in some situations. You cannot “move” contents in the following situations. (Instead, you will want to “copy” them.) page 56). • The content is protected ( • A specified portion of the title (chapter) is copyprotected, in which case, you cannot move from DVD-RAM to the HDD. • You cannot move a Playlist. Only copying is permitted. When you copy a Playlist to a disc, it will be treated an Original on the disc. The original Playlist does not change to an Original. Also, you cannot “move” or “copy” contents in the following situations: • The recorded content contains a program that permits a single copy only. • Notes • If either the HDD or DVD-RAM is not in optimum physical condition, an error may occur when you execute “Move” and some titles or chapters may be lost. If you want to “Move” non-copy-protected titles and chapters, it is recommended for safety that you first “Copy” them to the opposite drive and confirm they have been copied properly. Then delete the titles and chapters to which you have executed “Move”. • The recorder cannot copy/move the following discs: DVD-VIDEO VIDEO CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW • If you cannot copy/move for some other reason, such as insufficient disc capacity, etc., a message will appear on screen. In such a case, follow the instructions in the message. • Depending on the content, associated information such as data management may not be copied/moved. • You cannot copy/move titles containing still pictures. • Dubbing to DVD-R/RW may divide the original title depending on the contents. Also, the DVD-Video format recording ( page 112) may shift thumbnails. • A part with aspect ratio 16:9 recorded at bit rate 1.0Mbps or 1.4Mbps cannot be dubbed to a DVD-R/RW. Change the aspect ratio to 4:3. • “High speed dubbing” ( page 100) and “A: High speed dubbing (Dubbing specified parts together)” ( page 102) procedures always comply with “Aspect ratio(Video mode)” setting ( page 184). The title (Playlist) contains a portion that prohibits copying. Edit the title from the Original and create a new Playlist. 98 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 98 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording and playback while dubbing Dubbing process by “High speed dubbing” and “Dub selected items” procedures will allow you to make a recording or playback of other titles. HDD DVD Playback Recording Playback Recording Recording HDD DVD DVD Available Available Not available Not available DVD HDD Not available Not available Not available Not available HDD HDD Not available Not available Available Available DVD DVD Available Available Not available Not available Playback HDD Editing Notes • Timer programmed recording have priority over other operations. Dubbing may be stopped if a timer program recording starts. • While recording and dubbing are in progress at the same time, CONTENT MENU and LIBRARY MENU will not appear. page 48), is not possible while dubbing. • Playing a recorded title while recording another on the same disc ( Library Network Navi Function setup Others 99 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 99 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 4: Dubbing to save (Continued) A: High speed dubbing (Dubbing only a specified part) HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R This section explains how to dub a specific title or chapter. To select several parts and dub them all at once, refer to page 102. 1 2 Start Press CONTENT MENU, then press to select a title. / / Press QUICK MENU. The Quick Menu appears. QUICK MENU 3 Press / to select “High speed dubbing” from the Quick Menu, then press ENTER. “CONTENT MENU High Speed Library Dubbing” appears. ENTER e.g. CONTENT High Speed Library Dubbing MENU 2006/03/30 09:00pm TV:4 (0:52:40) Original Copy (Saves Original) Move (Deletes Original) Same Disc (Saves Original) Network (Saves Original) 100 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 100 06.3.20, 4:16 PM / Introduction ENTER Library Copying starts. The job progress is displayed on the screen and the front panel display. When the job finishes, the graph disappears and the buzzer sounds. Network Navi You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when the job finishes. (1) During the operation, press QUICK MENU button. (2) Press / buttons to select “Auto power off”. (3) Press ENTER button. Notes A title or a chapter becomes a title by being copied. “Same Disc” job using a DVD-RAM disc will take a longer time. “Same Disc” is not available on DVD-R/RW. “Move” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW. Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed. For a copy-once permitted content, only moving from the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc is available. Executing this will delete the original content in the HDD, and the one moved to a DVD-RAM will not be able to moved or copied. • “High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment. • If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All HDD titles delete” ( page 186). 1) While copying, press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. Notes • Cancellation of a copying operation will result in deletion of a portion of the title or chapter already copied. • Cancellation of a copying to a DVD-R cannot restore the disc space in the DVD-R. 2) Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”, then press ENTER. 101 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others To cancel copying halfway through the operation Function setup • • • • • • 101 Editing Press ENTER. ENTER RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 Playback 5 Copy: After the operation is completed, a specified part will remain on the disc where it was previously located. Move: A part will move to the opposite disc and will be erased from the disc where it was previously located. Same Disc: A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied part will become another title. This operation is useful to change a Playlist to Original. Network: To copy to another TOSHIBA DVD recorder within the same network. See “Network Navi” ( page 141). “Copy” or “Move” is automatically selected in the following cases. Copy: When a specified title (or chapter) is a Playlist. When a specified title (or chapter) is locked ( page 56). Move: When a specified title (or chapter) is copy-protected. Recording 4 Press / to select “Copy”, “Move”, “Same Disc” or “Network”. Editing Creating your own title – 4: Dubbing to save (Continued) A: High speed dubbing (Dubbing specified parts together) HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R This section explains how to copy several specific titles or chapters. Assigned names of titles/chapters or other information can also be copied. A title or chapter becomes a title by being copied. 1 Start Press HDD or DVD to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to copy. HDD DVD 2 Press EDIT MENU. EDIT MENU 3 Press / to select “Dub Selected Items”, then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Dub Selected Items” appears. ENTER e.g. EDIT Dub Selected MENU Items HDD Source will be Title. Dub To: Capacity Title Original DVD Start B A Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the upper area. To change the dubbing destination: 1) Press QUICK MENU button. 2) Press / buttons to select “Change media to HDD” or “Change Media to DVD”. 3) Press ENTER button. 102 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 102 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording 4 Press / / / to select a part (a title or chapter) to copy. • To go to the next or previous page, press PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button. ENTER • To select a chapter, first select the title that contains the chapter you want, then press button. To go back to the title display, press button again. HDD MENU Source will be Title. Original DVD Editing 5 Dub To: Title Playback e.g. EDIT Dub Selected Items Press ENTER. B A A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media). e.g. EDIT Dub Selected MENU Items HDD Title Original ENTER Library Source will be Title. Dub To: DVD Cursor Capacity Start 6 Network Navi B A Press / to select a location to place the selected part, then press ENTER. If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor to the left and press ENTER button. Function setup ENTER The selected part is inserted into the location of the cursor. e.g. EDIT Dub Selected MENU Items HDD Source will be Title. Dub To: Original DVD Others Capacity Title Start B A (Continued) 103 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 103 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 4: Dubbing to save (Continued) 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6. You can confirm the available space of the destination media via the bar at the bottom of the display. Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media as a title. • To cancel selection of an individual part, see 8 page 105. Press / to select “Start”, press ENTER, and select “Yes”, then press ENTER. ENTER The broadcast picture appears and dubbing starts. The progress for each title is displayed on the screen and in the front panel display on the recorder. The buzzer sounds when the operation is completed. You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when the job is completed. 1) During the job, press QUICK MENU button. 2) Press / buttons to select “Auto power off”. 3) Press ENTER button. Notes • This procedure of “Dub Selected Items” of specified parts does not move them. If you do not want to leave the items on the original disc, delete them in the procedure for “Deleting recorded contents” ( page 55). • To confirm the contents of an item, first select the item by using / / / buttons and press QUICK MENU button to display Quick Menu. Press / buttons to select “Preview” (or ”Title information”) then press ENTER button. • Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom of the menu for about 2 seconds. • “High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment. • Dubbing procedures to DVD-R/RW always comply with “Aspect ratio(Video mode)” setting ( page 184). • Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed. • If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All HDD titles delete” ( page 186). 104 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 104 06.3.23, 8:52 AM Introduction Cancelling selection of an item e.g. EDIT MENU Dub Selected Items Quick Menu HDD Cancel selected title Preview Preview all selected items Title information Clear all selected items Auto power off Exit Dub To: Original DVD Playback Capacity Title Recording 1) Press / / / to select an item then press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. Start B A 2) Press / to select “Cancel selected title” (or “All clear” for cancelling selection of multiple items at a time). Editing 3) Press ENTER. Changing the position of an item Library Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the page 103 to item, then repeat steps 4 to 6 on insert the item into its desired location. Cancelling while dubbing Network Navi Press QUICK MENU to display Quick Menu. Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”, then press ENTER. Note • This procedure copies items according to their order indicated in the lower area. Therefore, there may be a case that some items have already been copied at the time you cancel dubbing. Function setup Others 105 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 105 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 4: Dubbing to save (Continued) B: Rate conversion dubbing (Dubbing at a modified bit rate) HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R You can reduce the recorded picture or sound rate when copying. This procedure enables content originally recorded onto the HDD at high rate setting to be dubbed onto a DVD-RAM disc at a reduced bit rate. Use the Rate conversion dubbing when • you recorded a lengthy content on the HDD using the manual high rate, and it is too large to dub onto the DVD-RAM disc. page 184) to “Off”, and you want to make a • you recorded a title with setting the “DVD compatible mode” ( DVD-R/RW disc for that title, or you used another recorder to record a title on a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to create a DVD-R/RW disc for that title (Set “DVD compatible mode” to “Main” or “SAP” then execute this procedure). The Rate conversion dubbing can be performed in two different ways: part by part or multiple parts in one time. (To dub multiple parts in one time, the same rate is applied to all parts. You cannot set a different rate to each part.) Rate conversion dubbing for part by part 1 2 3 Start Press HDD or DVD to select a disc containing the parts that you want to dub. Press CONTENT MENU, then press to select a title. / / Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. QUICK MENU 4 Press / to select “Rate conversion dubbing”, then press ENTER. “CONTENT MENU Rate Conversion Dub” appears. ENTER e.g. CONTENT Rate conversion dubbing MENU (0:52:40) 2006/03/30 08:00pm TV:12 Original Copy (Saves Original) Same Disc (Saves Original) Original Copy Result D/M2 LP 2.0 D/M2 LP 2.0 Select Quick Menu to modify bitrate. Higher bitrate for copied media will not improve quality. All chapter marks will be deleted. 106 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 106 06.3.20, 4:16 PM / Introduction ENTER to select “Copy” or “Same Disc”. Copy: After the operation is completed, a specified part will remain on the disc where it was previously located. Same Disc: A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied part will become another title. Confirm picture and sound rates. QUICK MENU Playback 6 / Recording 5 Press To make changes, follow the procedure below. 1) Press QUICK MENU button to display Quick Menu. e.g. CONTENT Rate conversion dubbing MENU Quick Menu Auto rate selection Auto power off Exit ENTER (0:52:40) Original Editing 2004/06/11 08:00pm TV:12 User record quality Copy (Saves Original) Same Disc (Saves Original) Function setup ENTER Copying starts. To confirm the job progress, press TIME BAR button to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.) When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the current broadcast picture appears. Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may vary. Network Navi 7 Press ENTER. Library 2) Press / buttons to select an item then press ENTER button. User record quality: The current settings you have made ( page 183) are listed. Press ADJUST (-/+) button to select a desired setting. Auto rate selection: The recorder automatically selects the highest possible rate, calculating from current unoccupied volume on the disc. (This operation does not insure full recording of any length program or whole use of unoccupied volume.) Others 107 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 107 06.3.23, 8:52 AM Editing Creating your own title – 4: Dubbing to save (Continued) Rate Conversion Dubbing for multiple parts 1 2 Start Press HDD or DVD to select a disc containing the parts you want to dub. Press EDIT MENU. “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears. EDIT MENU 3 Press / to select “Rate Conv. Items”, then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Rate Conv. Items” appears. ENTER e.g. EDIT MENU Rate Conv. Items HDD Dub To: 4 Title Original DVD Collect parts to be dubbed, using steps 4 to 6 page 103. on B A Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media as a title. You can cancel selection of an individual part. 1) Press / / / buttons to select an item then press QUICK MENU button. Quick Menu appears. 2) Press / buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or “All clear” for cancelling selection of multiple items at a time). 3) Press ENTER button. 108 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 108 06.3.20, 4:16 PM To change the setting, perform the following steps. 1) Press QUICK MENU button to display Quick Menu. 2) Press / buttons to select “User record quality” and press ENTER button. 3) Press ADJUST ( / ) button to select the setting number and press ENTER button. When “Copy” on the bottom shows “X”, the selected parts are beyond the disc capacity. Change the rate for picture and sound quality or reduce parts to dub. Recording Press / to select “Start”, and select “Yes”, then press ENTER. ENTER 2) Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”. 3) Press ENTER. Turning off the power automatically after dubbing 1) While dubbing, press QUICK MENU. 2) Press / to select “Auto power off”. Others Notes • Unlike High speed dubbing, Rate conversion dubbing may cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of recorded content. The time required for dubbing is about the same as the playback time of the content. • Quality will not be improved even if you select a rate higher than original content. • Rate conversion dubbing to the same DVD-RAM/R/RW disc is not possible. • The recorder automatically inserts a black picture for a moment before and after the new title produced by this recording process. • You cannot use the Rate Conversion Dubbing for copying from a DVD-RAM disc to another DVD-RAM disc. 109 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 109 Function setup 3) Press ENTER. Network Navi Note • A portion of content from the start of recording to the moment you cancel dubbing will be copied. Library 1) Press QUICK MENU. • During Rate conversion dubbing, the relay recording function ( page 185) is disabled even if “Relay Recording” is set to “On”. • During Rate conversion dubbing, switching the audio channel is not possible. • Audio processed under the Rate conversion dubbing is recorded in stereo. • When you record an SAP program and play it back, the main and sub sound are output at the same time. Select the sound by pressing AUDIO button. • When you set “DVD compatible Mode” to “Main” or “SAP” ( page 184), only a selected sound (the main or sub sound) of the SAP program is recorded. (Stereo broadcasting is recorded as stereo). • If you perform the Rate conversion dubbing for a Playlist, containing a chapter that is the beginning of the Original title at recording, one frame at the beginning will be removed. • During Rate conversion dubbing, P in P function ( page 70) is disabled. • Rate conversion dubbing to DVD-R/RW selects aspect ratio according to the first title of dubbed items. • Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom of the menu for about 2 seconds. Editing Cancelling dubbing during rate conversion dubbing Copying starts. To confirm the job progress, press TIME BAR button to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.) When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the current broadcast picture appears. Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may vary. Playback 6 Introduction 5 Check the rate for picture and sound quality. 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating your own title – 4: Dubbing to save (Continued) C: Line-U dubbing (Recording pictures while viewing them) HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R You can record the picture being played back in either disc, or to the other disc, if the content is not copy-protected. page 112), back to the HDD. This procedure can be used also to copy contents of a DVD-R/RW you created ( Preparation • Make sure that the destination disc has adequate available remaining space. • When you want to copy to the HDD, load a disc you want to play. Example: To copy from a DVD-RAM disc to the HDD 1 Press INPUT SELECT or CH/Page repeatedly to select “LineU.” INPUT SELECT A black screen appears. Line U Stereo CH/Page 2 Press HDD. HDD 3 Press REC. Recording starts. REC 4 Press DVD. DVD Start 5 Start playing. PLAY 110 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 110 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction STOP Playing stops, and a black screen returns. Press HDD. Playback 7 Recording 6 When playback of contents you want to copy is finished, press STOP. HDD Editing 8 Press STOP. Recording stops. STOP Library 111 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p097-111 Function setup 111 Network Navi Notes • The following combinations of a source and a destination disc are possible. HDD to HDD, HDD to DVD-RAM, HDD to DVD-R/RW, DVD-RAM to HDD, DVD-R/RW to HDD • A title dubbed by this procedure has black pictures at both the beginning and the end of the title. Therefore thumbnails in page 126. CONTENT MENU may be black. If you change the thumbnail, see • You can record still pictures and slow pictures during playback. • Contents of DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD and audio CD cannot be recorded with “Line-U dubbing”. • “Line-U dubbing” may cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of contents. • Screen menus such as CONTENT MENU or EDIT MENU cannot be recorded by “Line-U dubbing”. • “Line-U dubbing” cannot be set as programme recording. • When doing this procedure, programmed recording must not be initiated. If you display TV Guide On Screen®, playback is automatically canceled. • When setting the input to Line-U, audio output is set to stereo automatically. You cannot switch the audio channel. During “Line-U dubbing”, you can change the audio output. • Accompanying audio content to be recorded with “Line-U dubbing” is always in stereo. • During “Line-U dubbing”, the virtual surround function ( page 180) is disabled. • Even if “Relay recording” is set to “On” ( page 185), the relay recording function is disabled during “Line-U dubbing”. • For “Line-U dubbing”, a scene permitting copy-once cannot be copied. page 70) is disabled. • During Line-U dubbing, P in P function ( Editing DVD-RW DVD-R Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW Content stored on the HDD of the recorder can be edited and copied to a DVD-R/RW, a popular media for distribution, and played on a compatible DVD video player. Notice • Beforehand confirm the contents of a disc. If you use a DVD-R disc, prepare a new one. This DVD-Video creation procedure is possible only once per disc on this recorder. Once you have copied to a DVD-R, you cannot redo, add, delete, or correct the copied contents in the disc. If you start copying then cancel the job, you cannot re-use the DVD-R. If you use a DVD-RW, be sure to confirm the contents in it. This procedure overwrites a whole disc, and all of the contents in a DVD-RW will be lost. If you want to add contents to a DVD-RW, do not use this procedure. Record directly or make a dubbing to the DVD-RW, then execute the finalization ( page 122). This procedure includes the finalizing process, and you will not be able to add, delete, or correct contents to a DVD-RW later, as it will have been finalized. If a finalized DVD-RW has remaining space, you can add contents there if you cancel the finalizing process of the DVD-RW ( page 125). • Do not start copying to a DVD-R/RW when programmed recording is scheduled to begin shortly. Copying entirely to a DVD-R/RW will take 1 hour and a half (variable depending on the contents). (This does not include time for “Writing Test”. This option requires more time. Actual time for “Writing Test” depends on the contents to test, and may be longer than the playing time of the contents if the disc contains too little contents or too many quality and picture settings, etc.) If a start time of a programmed recording comes during this procedure, the recording is made onto the HDD. However, while making a menu theme, the recording is not executed. Also, programmed recordings to DVD page 185) are not executed. media with “Off” setting of “Relay recording” ( If a programmed recording starts during this procedure, you cannot continue to make another disc after completion of the first disc. • Ensure the compatibility of a disc. page 9. Refer to the * Discs made by this procedure will comply with the DVD-Video standard. However, it is not guaranteed to play properly on all DVD video players (including TOSHIBA products). Depending on the disc, there may be a difference of data capacity between DVD-R and DVD-RW. It may be possible that contents you have just recorded onto a DVD-R cannot be recorded onto a DVD-RW. (DVD-RW capacity may be smaller.) • Follow the instructions on handling of the disc. Preparation • Record contents which you want to copy to DVD-R/RW disc to make DVD-Video, to the HDD with the following settings: page 184): “Main” or “SAP”. - “DVD compatible mode” ( - Bit rate of 4.0 or more. • Load a new DVD-R/RW disc. (Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.) • Press HDD button to select the HDD mode. Notes • If you recorded a title while setting “DVD compatible mode” ( page 184) to “Off” or you used another recorder to record a title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to copy such a title to a DVD-R/RW to create a DVD-Video, first set “DVD compatible mode” to “Main” or “SAP” then execute the procedure of “Rate conversion dubbing for multiple parts” ( page 108). • Depending on the disc, DVD-R 4x speed compatibility may be disabled. 112 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 112 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears. EDIT MENU e.g. EDIT MENU HDD Main Menu Chapter Editing Edit Functions Title Merge Divide 2 3 4 5 Playback Playlist Editing Dub Selected Items Rate Conv. Items Combine ORG Title DVD-Video Creation DVD-Video Finalizing Del Selected Items 1 1 Source DV Recording Chapter Editing Chapters can be divided on frame basis. Chapters can be merged and assigned names. Press / to select “DVD-Video Creation”, then press ENTER. Editing 2 Recording 1 Press EDIT MENU. “EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items)” appears. ENTER e.g. EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items) HDD Sourece: Title Original Library Creating Media: DVD Next Capacity A B Start 3 Network Navi Thumbnails of titles on the HDD are displayed in the upper area. Press / / / to select a part (a title or chapter) to copy to a DVD-R/RW disc. e.g. EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items) HDD Sourece: Title Function setup ENTER • To go to the preceding or following page, press PICTURE SEARCH button. • To select a chapter, first select the title that contains the chapter you want, then press button. button again. To return to the title display, press Original Others Creating Media: DVD Next Capacity B A (Continued) 113 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 113 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued) 4 Press ENTER. A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media). ENTER e.g. EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items) HDD Sourece: Title Original Creating Media: DVD Cursor Next Capacity B 5 A Press / to select a location to place the selected part, then press ENTER. If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor to the left and press ENTER button. ENTER The selected part is inserted into the location of the cursor. e.g. EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items) HDD Sourece: Title Original Creating Media: DVD Next Capacity B 6 A Repeat steps 3 to 5. You can check the available volume of a DVD-R/RW on the bar at the bottom of the menu. Each of the assembled parts is recorded onto the destination media as a title. • To cancel selected parts see page 120. • To change the title/chapter name or thumbnail before selecting: 1) Select the part that you want to change, and press QUICK MENU button. 2) Press the / buttons to select “Edit title name” or “Modify title thumbnail” to change the title, or “Edit chapter name” or “Modify chapter thumbnail” to change the chapter, and press ENTER button. 3) Use the entry screen to change the title or chapter name. To change a title thumbnail or a chapter thumbnail, see the steps on page 126. 114 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 114 06.3.20, 4:16 PM to select “Next”, then press A screen is displayed to select options. DVD Video Creation(Option Settings) Menu Create Start Play Title+Chapter Menu Title After play one title Menu Next Title Menu Title 1 Set Aspect Ratio None Original Parts Test 4:3 fixed Stop All Test 16:9 fixed / / / Playback Return Next A B Press None Title 1 After play final title Writing Test Chapter Recording e.g. EDIT MENU ENTER 8 Introduction 7 Press / ENTER. to set the items. ENTER • When you have selected “Parts Test” or “All Test” for “Writing Test”, extra time is required for pre-writing test. “All Test” requires more time than “Parts Test”. Editing For the instruction of setting, see the description shown at selection. If you select “None” for “Menu Create”: The setting of “Start Play” and “Start after playing one title” is skipped automatically. Library 9 Press / ENTER. to select “Next”, then press A screen is displayed to confirm the information you are going to write. e.g. EDIT MENU Network Navi ENTER DVD Video Creation(Disc Information) Disc name Edit Name Total title number 11 1 hour 24 min. Total time Next A Press button to select “Edit Name” and press ENTER button to go to the character entry screen. The number of characters is limited for the disc name you can enter. (Continued) 115 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p112-115 115 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others If you selected “None” for “Menu Create” at step 8, select “Writing” on the bottom right corner, and press ENTER button. Skip to step 14. Function setup Return B Editing Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued) 10 Press to select “Next”, then press ENTER. A display of title menu selection appears if “Menu Create” is set to “Title+Chapter” or “Title” at step 7. ENTER page 119), go to the To view your captured images ( next page. e.g. EDIT MENU DVD Video Creation(Title Menu Select) MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT Deep Blue DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE Orange DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE Cyber Green B LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE Light Blue MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT Sepia LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE Olive MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE 1/ 2 MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE Lavender MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE Cyber Red A button, you can preview the selected If you press menu. To return, press O button. While displaying a preview screen of your captured image, you can access the other menu to correct color page 119) by pressing button. ( 11 Press / / / press ENTER. ENTER 12 Press to select the menu, then If you have set “Menu Create” to “Title+Chapter” or “Chapter” at step 7, a screen is displayed to select a chapter menu. / / / to select the chapter menu. The selected menu is set for all chapters. You cannot set it for each chapter individually. ENTER If you press button, you can preview the selected menu. To return, press O button. If you press button to select “Return” while previewing and press ENTER button, you will return to the preview of the title menu. To go back to the chapter menu, press / / / button to select a number next to “Chapter Menu” on the bottom center. 116 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 116 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction 13 Press ENTER on “EDIT MENU DVD-Video Creation (Chapter Menu Select)” display. A confirmation message is displayed. Recording ENTER ENTER / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. Playback 14 Press The current broadcast picture appears and dubbing starts. The progress is displayed on the screen and in the front panel display on the recorder. When the process is completed, a message “Create another DVD-Video now?” appears (except when “Auto power off” (see below) is set). If you select “Yes”, you can make one more DVD-R/RW of the same content. If you select “No”, you can complete creating the DVDVideo. Library • You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when the job finishes. 1) During the job, press QUICK MENU button. 2) Press / buttons to select “Auto power off”. 3) Press ENTER button. Editing When copying is completed, a finalizing process follows. This enables the disc to be played on a DVD video player. Network Navi Function setup Others 117 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 117 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued) Notes • The number of titles that you can write on a DVD-R/RW disc is limited (99 titles. Each title should have 99 chapters or less). If you have a large number of titles or chapters, you may not be able to write due to the limitation of the DVD specifications. Also, even if the number of titles and chapters is within the limit, you may not be able to write if you have a large number of menu items. • Due to standard differences, the number of chapters and their position may change slightly after DVD-Video creation. (For chapters generated on a DVD-R/RW disc, the same thumbnail for the Original chapter is displayed.) • Due to standard limitation, a DVD-R/RW disc may contain unnecessary scenes after creation. • If you select items of various types of video outputs, aspect ratios or other properties, or if you select an item recorded with different settings, they may be divided into titles. (For titles generated on a DVD-R/RW disc the same thumbnail for the Original title is displayed). • Content based on a complicated PlayList or composed of too many items may not be copied properly. • Copy-once permitted contents cannot be copied to a DVD-R/RW disc, even if they are recorded onto the HDD while “DVD compatible mode” is set to “Main” or “SAP” ( page 184). • Content recorded on a recorder other than this recorder (including TOSHIBA products) cannot be copied to a DVDR/RW disc using High Speed Dubbing. First set “DVD compatible mode” to “Main” or “SAP” and record them onto the HDD. Then perform “Rate conversion dubbing for multiple parts” ( page 108) to copy to the HDD. • When a content is recorded with manual rate 1.0 Mbps or 1.4 Mbps and is including a 16:9 picture shape scene, the DVD creation of the content may fail. In this case, set “Set Aspect Ratio” to “4:3 fixed” on the menu “(Option Settings)”. • Even if the title is recorded with “DVD compatible mode” set to “Main” or “SAP”, using a recorder other than this may cause failure when recording to a DVD-R/RW disc. • If the DVD-Video creating fails to be completed, most of the discs cannot be used again. • If an error occurs while a DVD-Video is created, the error code “ERR- ” ( indicates the error code) is shown in ** ** page 193) To the front panel display of the recorder. ( clear this display, press DISPLAY button. • There may be a difference between a specified thumbnail of menu in the DVD-Video creation procedure and the one on displayed in CONTENT MENU. Selecting the items displayed on the menu You can hide items on the menu if necessary. To hide a disc name Leave “Disc Name” blank. Display the on-screen keyboard and press CLEAR button to delete letters, button to save. then press To hide a page number Leave “Disc Name” blank. Follow the above method. To hide a disc name and show a page number Enter one more space in “Disc Name”. To hide a title/chapter name On CONTENT MENU or a display of item selection, select a title/chapter and display the on-screen keyboard from Quick Menu. Erase all characters of the name. You can hide a time also using the same manner. • “Chapter 0001” . . . on CONTENT MENU means that the chapter is given no characters as its name. Such a chapter does not show the name on the menu. • A chapter menu shows the title name at the top right corner. If you hide the title name, no character appears in this area. To hide a title/chapter name and show a time Enter one more space and save it as the title/ chapter name. Note • You cannot hide items other than above. 118 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 118 06.3.20, 4:16 PM You can select favorite scenes from the recorded contents and use them as menus of DVD-Video page 116) DVD-R/RW. Created ( To delete all captured images, select “Delete all menus”. 3) Press QUICK MENU. 4) Press / to select “Save captured images”. 5) Select a scene. Locate a scene using the buttons such as PLAY, SLOW, FRAME or PAUSE, etc. e.g. EDIT MENU to select “Loading” and press Save captures images HDD 2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3 Original Aspect Ratio 4:3 Loading Location 00:00:00:03F Select back ground picture Title: 002 Chapter: 0004 00:54:30 Several options are available: a translucent background for better legibility, character color and cursor color selections. 1) At step 10 ( page 116), go to the next page and select a captured image by / / / , . then press The preview screen appears. . 2) Press A color setting display appears. e.g. Editing 00:00:00 Selecting color options on menus EDIT DVD-Video Creation (color setting) MENU Back ground color Color T001(00:00:23) On 0.5 0.7 DO NOT Character color 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DO NOT Selecting color Selected color LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE Set up the disc name, the title name or page numer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 on upper side of the screen, OR the letter color of the title name, the chapter and the time beside 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 name the thumbnail. A 3) Set each item by / / / , referring to the guidance on the right half of the display, finally press to exit. The preview screen returns. HDD Quick Menu 2006/03/30 05:09pm CH:3 Enter DVD-Video menu name Delete name Original Aspect Ratio 4:3 Delete all menus Loading Location 00:00:00:03F Exit Network Navi Save captures images LEAVE HERE DO NOT Library To name a captured image Press / / / to select an image to name then press QUICK MENU. Press / to select “Enter DVD-Video menu name” then press ENTER. MENU DO NOT 0.9 B EDIT Black LEAVE HERE Notes • You cannot capture copy-protected contents. • The maximum number of pictures which can be saved varies depending on the data size. e.g. Off White LEAVE HERE Permeation Ratio B Playback 6) Press / ENTER. Recording 1) Press CONTENT MENU. 2) Press / / / to select a title which contains a scene to use as menus. To delete a captured image Press / / / to select an image to delete then press QUICK MENU. Press / to select “Delete menu” then press ENTER. Follow the message to operate. Introduction Using a favorite scene as a menu Select back ground picture Title: 002 Chapter: 0004 Function setup 00:00:00 00:54:30 T001(00:00:23) B The on-screen keyboard appears. Enter a name. Others 119 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 119 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Continued) To improve legibility of characters on menus Press / / / to set “Back ground color” to “On”. Then select “Color” (“White” or “Black”) according to the menu’s tone, and set “Permeation Ratio”, which sets the how translucent the selected Back ground color is. The higher the ratio, the Back ground color will be more translucent but the lower legibility of characters. To change the character color Press / / / to select from 12 colors. When you select “White” back ground color, dark color should be a better choice. Canceling selection of an item 1) Press / / / to select an item then press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. e.g. EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items) Quick Menu HDD Cancel selected title Preview Preview all selected items Title information Clear all selected items Auto power off Exit Sourece: Title Creating Media: DVD Next Capacity B To change the cursor color “Selecting Color” is a color for the moving cursor. “Selected Color” is one for the press of ENTER button. To preview your selections Press O button to return to the preview screen. If you correct your selections, repeat steps 2) and 3) page 119). ( Original A 2) Press / to select “Cancel selected title” (or “Clear all selected items” for canceling selection of all items at a time). 3) Press ENTER. The selected item disappears. Changing the location of an item Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the item, then repeat steps 3 to 5 to re-insert the item in a desired location ( page 113, 114). Confirming the content in the lower area Select an item and press QUICK MENU. Then press / to select “Preview” and press ENTER. Notes • Each time an item is selected, its name appears at the bottom of the screen. • You can also confirm the content by selecting “Title information” from Quick Menu. Canceling dubbing process Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu. Press / to select “Stop creating DVD video”, then press ENTER. Notes • If you cancel creating DVD-Video on a DVD-R disc, the disc will become unusable in most cases. • Canceling is not always possible. 120 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 120 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction If a message appears while selecting a part Recording You may receive a message, such as “Selection of Writing Test in the next option setting is recommended to check whether Aspect Ratio coexists”. If a copyprohibited content is included, or if the aspect ratio is changed meanwhile, cancel the selection. If you are not sure, select Writing Test (“Parts Test” or “All Test”). Playback Note • Depending on selection or condition of items, copying may result in failure. If a message appears, be sure to, prior to step 7, press QUICK MENU button. Then press / buttons to select “Cancel selected title”, and press ENTER button. If you do not do this and continue the copying process, an error may occur and the disc will be rendered useless. Playing a created DVD-Video Editing You can play the DVD-R/RW in the same manner as you would play a DVD video disc. See page 66. If you want to correct the contents of a DVD-RW after the DVD-Video creation procedure Library Cancel the finalization of the DVD-RW ( page 125). It is possible only on DVD-RW recorded on this recorder. After canceling, you can delete titles. However, you cannot re-use the whole disc, since only the last title can restore the disc space. Network Navi If you want to delete all contents of a DVD-RW after the DVD-Video creation procedure Load the DVD-RW into the recorder and initialize it, then execute the procedure of DVD-Video creation page 112). ( Function setup Others 121 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p116-121 121 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-Video finalizing process The recorder processes recorded data in a DVD-R/RW disc so that it can be played on other compatible devices. Important • You cannot rewrite data onto a disc after you execute the DVD-Video finalizing process. However, the disabled rewritability of page 125). On DVD-R discs, canceling of the DVDa DVD-RW disc can be restored by canceling the process of the disc ( Video finalizing process is not available. Canceling of the DVD-Video finalizing process is available only on DVD-RW recorded or copied contents on this recorder. Preparation • Press DVD button to select the DVD mode. • Load a DVD-R/RW disc you want to execute the finalizing process. 1 Press EDIT MENU. “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears. EDIT MENU 2 Press / e.g. to select “DVD-Video Finalizing”. EDIT Main Menu DVD-R MENU ENTER Used to create compatibility between the recorded DVD-R/-RW and DVD Players. Also used for setting up “menu picture”, etc. Title Title 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 Playlist Editing Dub Selected Items Rate Conv. Items Combine ORG Title DVD-Video Creation DVD-Video Finalizing Del Selected Items 2 Press ENTER. A display of option settings appears. e.g. ENTER Start Edit Functions Title 2 Finalize Menu 3 Source DV Recording Chapter Editing DVD-Video Finalizing EDIT DVD-Video Finalize(Option Settings) MENU Menu Create Start Play Title+Chapter Menu Title After play one title Menu Next Title After play final title Menu Title 1 Writing Test Set Aspect Ratio None Original Chapter Parts Test 4:3 fixed Stop All Test 16:9 fixed Return B A 122 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 122 None Title 1 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Next Introduction / / to select. As you select each item, its function is explained. ENTER When “Menu Create” is set to “None”: “Start play” and “After play one title” are automatically omitted. Press / ENTER. to select “Next”, then press Playback 5 / Recording 4 Press Information on data to be processed appears. e.g. EDIT MENU DVD-Video Finalize(Disc Information) ENTER Disc name Edit Name Total time Editing Total title number 11 1 hour 24 min. Return Next A B Library If you press button to select “Edit Name” then press ENTER button, a keyboard appears so that you can enter a title name. When “Menu Create” is set to “None”: Select “Writing” at the right bottom by / / / buttons and press ENTER button. Skip to step 10. to select “Next”, then press ENTER. When “Menu Create” is set to “Title+Chapter” or “Title”, a display of title menu selection appears. ENTER To view your captured images ( next page. page 119), go to the DVD-Video Finalize (Title Menu Select) MENU MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT LEAVE HERE LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE Sepia MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT 1/ 2 MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS Olive MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT DO NOT Deep Blue DO NOT MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE DO NOT LEAVE HERE Light Blue MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT Function setup e.g. EDIT DO NOT MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS DO NOT DO NOT Others button, you can preview the selected If you press menu. To return, press O button. While displaying a BpreviewA screen of your captured image, you can access the other menu to correct color page 119) by pressing button. ( (Continued) 123 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 123 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi 6 Press Editing DVD-Video finalizing process (Continued) 7 Press / / / press ENTER. to select the title menu, then A display of chapter menu selection appears if “Menu Create” is set to “Tltle+Chapter” or “Chapter” at step 3. ENTER 8 Press / / / to select the chapter menu. A selected menu is applied to all chapters. You cannot allocate a menu to each chapter. ENTER If you press button, you can preview the selected menu. To return, press O button. If you press button during preview, to select “Return” then press ENTER button, you can go to the preview of the selected title menu. To return to the preview of chapter menu, press / / / buttons to select a number next to “Chapter Menu” then press ENTER button. 9 Press ENTER on “EDIT MENU DVD-Video Finalize (Chapter Menu Select)” display, and select “Yes” by / , then press ENTER. ENTER 10 A message appears to ask you if you want the power to turn off automatically or not when the process is completed. Press / ENTER. ENTER to select “Yes” or “No” then press A message disappears and the finalize process starts. The progress is displayed on the screen and in the front panel display on the recorder. 124 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 124 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording Notes • DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder may not be recognized on other devices unless you execute DVDVideo finalizing process to them. • You can record onto a DVD-R disc additionally to the limit of the disc capacity, unless you execute the DVD-Video finalizing process to it. Deleting of recorded titles is also possible, however, the disc space cannot be restored. • You can record additional content onto a DVD-RW disc additionally to the limit of the disc capacity unless you execute the DVD-Video finalizing process to it. Deleting of recorded titles is also possible, however, the disc space can be restored only by the volume of the title last recorded. • On DVD-RW discs, it is possible to cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process or to initialize for a new use. • If a start time of a programmed recording comes during a finalizing process, the recording is made onto the HDD. However, while making a menu, the recording is not executed. Also, when “Relay recording” is set to “Off” the recording will not start. Playback Editing To cancel the finalize process DVD-RW You can cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process executed to a DVD-RW disc so that the disc can be recordable again. Library 1) During stop, press QUICK MENU. A quick menu appears. 2) Press / to select “Disc management” then press ENTER. 3) Press / to select “Cancel finalization” then press ENTER. / Network Navi 4) Read the message, and press “Yes”, then press ENTER. The process starts. to select Function setup Notes • While the recorder is ready to start a programmed recording, you cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process. • You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process executed on a DVD-RW disc recorded on other device. • You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process executed on a DVD-RW disc if the disc is protected. • Canceling the DVD-Video finalizing process may shift the thumbnails of titles/chapters. Others 125 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p122-125 125 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Editing Other editing functions Changing the picture on CONTENT MENU HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R You can register your favorite scene as a thumbnail displayed on CONTENT MENU. On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not available. 1 2 Start Press CONTENT MENU, then press to select a title. / Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. QUICK MENU 3 / e.g. CONTENT Title List MENU Quick Menu 1 / 2 Page HDD HDD Title : information 2004/06/08 07:00 Create thumbnail am TV:4 High speed dubbing (0:53:45) Rate conversion dubbing Chapter functionOriginal 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original Edit function 2004/06/12 09:00 Special playback pm mode TV:3 Save captured images(0:52:40) Disc informationOriginal Display changeover 2004/07/12 11:00 Specific page pmjump TV:4 Title delete (0:30:08) Exit Original 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Original Press / to select “Create thumbnail” (or “Create CHP thumbnail” if selected a chapter at step 1), then press ENTER. “CONTENT MENU Create Thumbnail” appears. ENTER e.g. CONTENT MENU Create Thumbnail HDD 2006/03/24 11:00pm Ch:6 (0:29:50) Original Location 00:00:00:03F Select desired thumbnail image via remote. To set, press enter. 00:00:00 Title:002 Chapter:0001 B 126 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 126 06.3.20, 4:16 PM 00:54:30 / Introduction PLAY At the point where you want to capture a thumbnail image, press PAUSE. e.g. CONTENT MENU Create Thumbnail Playback 5 Locate a scene you want to capture as a thumbnail. You can use the following buttons. PICTURE SEARCH, FRAME, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE, etc. Recording 4 Press PLAY to start playback. HDD PAUSE 2006/03/24 11:00pm Ch:6 (0:29:50) Original Location 00:06:25:23F 00:00:00 Title:002 Chapter:0001 Editing Select desired thumbnail image via remote. To set, press enter. 00:29:50 B Library 6 Press ENTER. CONTENT MENU returns. The selected scene is displayed as a thumbnail. ENTER e.g. CONTENT Title List MENU 1 / 2 Page HDD HDD : 2006/03/24 11:00 pm TV:6 (0:29:50) Original 2006/03/29 09:00 pm TV:3 (0:52:40) Original 2006/04/07 11:00 pm TV:4 (0:30:08) 2006/04/07 07:00 am TV:8 (0:54:30) Original 2006/04/08 09:00 pm TV:10 (0:51:28) Network Navi 2006/03/24 07:00 am TV:4 (0:53:45) Original Function setup 127 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 127 06.3.23, 8:54 AM Others Notes • There may be a small difference between a thumbnail made on the Create Thumbnail display and that displayed in CONTENT MENU. Operation with PICTURE SEARCH button may extend the difference. • You cannot create thumbnails of chapters in a title that contains a still picture. • If you create a chapter thumbnail, and then shift the chapter mark ( page 90) or record or edit the disc on other devices, the chapter thumbnail may return to the top of the chapter. Editing Other editing functions (Continued) Combining two titles (Original) into one HDD DVD-RAM Use this feature to combine two titles into one. The second title is deleted as the second title is added to the end of the first title. 1 2 Start Press HDD or DVD to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to merge. Press EDIT MENU. “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears. EDIT MENU 3 Press / to select “Combine ORG Title”, then press ENTER. “EDIT MENU Combine ORG Title” appears. e.g. EDIT MENU ENTER Combine ORG Title HDD Title Original Object :HDD For so rce only 2 titles (original) 4 Press / to select the first title to merge. B A Press PICTURE SEARCH button to move to the previous or next page. ENTER 5 Press ENTER. The cursor appears in the lower area of the screen (the title to merge to). ENTER Object :HDD For source, only 2 titles (original) can be selected. After combined, the second title is included into the first one. Cursor Start combining Title: B A 128 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 128 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction ENTER It is fixed at the left side at the beginning. Press ENTER button. The selected part moved into the location of the cursor. e.g. EDIT MENU Combine ORG Title HDD Title Original Playback Object :HDD For source, only 2 titles (original) can be selected. After combined, the second title is included into the first one. Start combining Title: A B Editing 7 Perform steps 4 to 6 and select the second title. You cannot select the same title. Network Navi Press / to select “Start combining” and press ENTER, then select “Yes” and press ENTER. Library To cancel the registered part: 1) Select the part that you want to cancel, and press QUICK MENU button to display the Quick Menu. 2) Press / buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or “Clear all selected items” for cancelling the selection of multiple items at a time). 3) Press ENTER button. 8 Recording 6 Press / to select the location to put the part and press ENTER. The combining process starts. ENTER Function setup Others Notes • You cannot stop the combining process after it has started. • You cannot combine titles if their length will exceed 9 hours. • You cannot combine a protected title or a title containing still pictures. • The title name of the first title is given to the title after combining. • The second title is combined into the first title, maintaining the chapter divisions and chapter names. • Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected. 129 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 129 06.3.20, 4:16 PM RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p126-130 130 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library To facilitate your collecting. Using Library data Searching for a desired title Viewing Library data Checking remaining space RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 131 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library HDD DVD-RAM Using Library data The recorder has a “Library Management” database which memorizes various properties of recordings made on this recorder, including date, media, title, genre, etc. Using this database, you can search for desired or available discs. You can utilize Library data as follows. • To search for a DVD-RAM disc that contains a desired title. • To check or change information of a title or disc. • To check the remaining space of a DVD-RAM disc. Basic operation of the Library system 1 Press LIBRARY. “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)” appears. LIBRARY e.g. Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) 1/ 2 MENU 2 No. Date Day HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD 2006/03/26 2006/03/25 2006/03/24 2006/03/23 2006/03/19 Su Sa Fr Th S Time 7:00 11:00 7:00 9:00 11 00 pm pm pm pm 5 4 3 3 2 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 2006/03/26 2006/03/25 2006/03/24 2006/03/23 2006/03/19 07:00pm 11:00pm 07:00pm 09:00pm 11 00 ... ... ... ... Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. QUICK MENU e.g. Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) MENU No. 1/ 2 Quick Menu Date Day Time DVD space remaining discSu no. 7:00 2004/all6/20 HDDDVD information 2004/ 6/19 Sa 11:00 HDDTitle Arrange HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00 Narrowing HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00 Jump 2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00 HDDDisc information 2004/ 6/13 Su 9:00 HDD Library management 6/11 Fr 9:00 HDD 2004/ Exit pm pm pm pm pm pm pm 9:00 pm HDD 2006/03/15 We HDD 2006/03/14 T 10:27 pm Start 3 CH Genre Press / ENTER. CH Genre 5 4 3 3 2 4 L1 L1 L2 t 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 2006/03/26 2006/03/25 2006/03/24 2006/03/23 2006/03/19 2006/03/19 2006/03/17 2006/03/15 2006/03/15 07:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 07:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 10:27pm to select an item, then press For details on each item, see from the next page. ENTER Notes • To cancel this procedure, press LIBRARY button. • The Library system does not support DVD-R/RW discs. • Selecting a title on “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, and pressing ENTER button begins playback of the title if the disc containing the title is loaded. • For proper function of the Library system, use DVD-RAM discs that shows a statement on its package such as “This disc can copy images that permit copying once.” If you use a DVD-RAM disc without such a statement, and then operate it on other device, the library data of the disc may not function properly. • LIBRARY MENU may not display all characters of a registered name of a disc. 132 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 132 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library HDD DVD-RAM Searching for a desired title Changing the listing order / The submenu appears. Press / buttons to select a genre, then press ENTER button. Titles within the selected genre are sorted. Recording 1) From Quick Menu, select “Arrange” by then press ENTER. The submenu appears. Sort by disc(DVD) Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) MENU No. 1/ 2 Quick Menu Date Day Time pm pm pm pm pm pm pm HDD 2006/03/15 We 9:00 pm HDD 2006/03/14 Tu 10:27 pm CH Genre 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name Arrange by title name Arrange by2004/06/20 disc no. 07:00pm ... 5 genre 11:00pm ... 4Arrange by 2004/06/19 Arrange by week 3 2004/06/18 07:00pm ... Arrange by date 3 2 4 L1 L1 L2 2004/06/17 2006/03/19 2006/03/19 2006/03/17 2006/03/15 etc ... 2006/03/15 09:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 10:27pm ... Note • If you repeat the selection of different types of the listing order, the old one precedes the new one. For example, when you select “Arrange by genre” then “Arrange by disc no.”, the order of genre is produced in the order of disc number. No. Date HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD 2006/03/26 2006/03/25 2006/03/24 2006/03/23 2006/03/19 2006/03/19 2006/03/17 2006/03/15 Day 1/ 2 Time CH Genre 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 2006/06/26 Su 7:00 pm 5 2006/03/25 Sa 11:00 pm 4 2006/03/24 Fr 7:00 pm 3 Sortpmby3disc(DVD) 2004/03/23 Th 9:00 Disc No. – Su 11:00 pm 2 0 0 1 2004/03/19 2006/03/19 Su 9:00 pm 4 2006/03/17 Fr 9:00 pm L1 2006/03/15 We 9:00 pm L1 07:00pm 11:00pm 07:00pm 09:00pm 11:00pm 09:00pm 09:00pm 09:00pm ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Follow steps 1) and 2) below. 1) Press / to select a location, then press ADJUST or / to enter the disc number. 2) Press ENTER. Titles in the specified disc are sorted. For example, if you enter “001-”, titles in discs 001, 001A and 001B are listed. Library Sort by day Narrowing Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) 1/ 2 Quick Menu Date Day Time DVD space remaining CH Genre Sort by genre 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 07:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 07:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 10:27pm ... Notes • Press O button to go back to the display for the previous narrowing condition. • If you want to display all titles, press QUICK MENU button, then press / buttons to select “Cancel narrowings” and press ENTER button. Function setup discSu no. 7:00 pm Sort 2004/all6/20 5 by disc(DVD) 2004/06/26 HDDDVD information 2004/ 6/19 Sa 11:00 pmSort 4 by disc(HDD) 2004/06/25 HDDTitle Arrange Sort by day 2004/06/24 HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00 pm 3 Narrowing 2006/03/23 HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00 pm 3 Jump 2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00 pm 2 2006/03/19 HDDDisc information 2004/management 6/13 Su 9:00 pm 4 2006/03/19 HDD Library 2004/ 6/11 2006/03/17 9:00 pm L1 HDD Exit Fr 2006/03/15 HDD 2006/03/15 We 9:00 pm L1 HDD 2006/03/14 Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc ... 2006/03/15 The submenu appears. Press / buttons to select the day, then press ENTER button. Titles recorded on the selected day are listed. Network Navi 1) From the Quick Menu, select “Narrowing” by / then press ENTER. The sub menu appears. No. Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) MENU Sort by disc(HDD) Titles in the HDD are sorted. Searching MENU e.g. Editing 2) Press / to select the listing order, then press ENTER. Titles are arranged in selected order. An input window appears. Playback DVD space remaining discSu no. 7:00 2004/all6/20 HDDDVD information 2004/ 6/19 Sa 11:00 HDDTitle Arrange HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00 Narrowing HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00 Jump 2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00 HDDDisc information 2004/management 6/13 Su 9:00 HDD Library 6/11 Fr 9:00 HDD 2004/ Exit e.g. buttons. If you Sort by genre Arrange e.g. / Introduction From the “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, you can select a title by using change the listing order or sort the titles, search may be easier. 2) Press / to select a narrowing condition, then press ENTER. Others 133 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 133 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library Searching for a desired title (Continued) Jumping Appoint disc no. The on-screen keyboard appears. Jump e.g. 1) From the Quick Menu, select “Jump” by then press ENTER. The submenu appears. e.g. Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) MENU 1/ 2 Quick Menu No. Date Day Time DVD space remaining discSu no. 7:00 2004/all6/20 HDDDVD information 2004/ 6/19 Sa 11:00 HDDTitle Arrange HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00 Narrowing HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00 Jump 2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00 HDDDisc information 2004/management 6/13 Su 9:00 HDD Library 6/11 Fr 9:00 HDD 2004/ Exit CH Genre / 3 3 2 4 L1 L1 L2 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 2006/03/24 2006/03/23 2006/03/19 2006/03/19 2006/03/17 2006/03/15 etc ... 2006/03/15 07:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 10:27pm ... 2) Press / to select the jump method, then press ENTER. Appoint character An input window appears. e.g. Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) 1/ 2 MENU No. HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD Date Day Time CH Genre 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 2006/03/26 Su 7:00 pm 5 2006/03/26 2006/03/25 Sa 11:00 pm 4 2006/03/25 2006/03/24 Fr 7:00 pm 3 2006/03/24 Specific Jump 2006/03/17 Th 3 2004/06/17 9:00 pmCharacter Character String: Jump 2006/03/13 Su 11:00 pm 2 2004/06/13 2006/03/19 Su 9:00 pm 4 2006/03/19 2006/03/17 Fr 9:00 pm L1 2006/03/17 2006/03/15 2006/03/15 We 9:00 pm L1 2006/03/14 Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc ... 2006/03/15 07:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 07:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 10:27pm ... 1/ 2 MENU Appoint character no. 07:00pm ... pm 5Appoint disc 2004/06/26 page 11:00pm ... pm 4 Specific2004/06/25 pm pm pm pm pm HDD 2006/03/15 We 9:00 pm 10:27 pm 2006/03/14 Tu HDD Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) No. Date HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD 2006/03/26 2006/03/25 2006/03/24 2006/03/23 2006/03/19 2006/03/19 2006/03/17 2006/03/15 2006/03/14 Day Time CH Genre 2006/03/26 Su 7:00 pm 5 2006/03/25 Sa 11:00 pm 4 2006/03/24 Fr 7:00 pm 3 3 No. Jump 2004/03/23 ThSpecific 9:00 pmDisc Disc No. 0 1 – 0 2 2004/03/19 Su 11:00 pm 2006/03/19 Su 9:00 pm 4 2006/03/17 Fr 9:00 pm L1 2006/03/15 We 9:00 pm L1 Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc ... 2006/03/15 1) Put the cursor on the input area and press ENTER. The on-screen keyboard appears. 2) Enter the first characters (up to 3 characters) of the title you are looking for. 3) Press to select “Jump” and press ENTER. The title that starts with the specified characters is selected. Note • The input window of “Specific Character Jump” can be shifted by pressing / buttons. 2) Press ENTER. The titles of the selected number disc are displayed. Specific page An input window appears. e.g. Summary LIBRARY Title (All Titles) No. Date HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD 2006/03/26 2006/03/25 2006/03/24 2006/03/23 2006/03/19 2006/03/19 2006/03/17 2006/03/15 2006/03/14 Day 1/ 2 Time 134 CH Genre 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 2006/06/26 Su 7:00 pm 5 2006/03/25 Sa 11:00 pm 4 2006/03/24 Fr 7:00 pm 3 Specific Page Jump 2004/03/23 Th 9:00 pm 3 ––– 2004/03/19 SuPage 11:00 Number pm 2 2006/03/19 Su 9:00 pm 4 2006/03/17 Fr 9:00 pm L1 9:00 pm 2006/03/15 L1 We Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc ... 2006/03/15 07:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 07:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 10:27pm ... Perform steps 1) and 2) below. 1) Press / or ADJUST to enter the page number. 2) Press ENTER. The selected page is displayed. 134 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 07:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 07:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 11:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 09:00pm ... 10:27pm ... Perform steps 1) and 2) below. 1) Press / to select the position to enter and press ADJUST or / to enter the disc number. Input 3 digits, and, if necessary A or B of disc. If you input “–”, you can leave the digit and the lower unspecified to search. For example, when “1 0 – –” is input, titles of disc number such as 100, 100A, 102 are searched, and a title list starting from the first found one appears. It is recommended that you execute “Arrange by disc no.” beforehand. MENU Perform steps 1) to 3) below. 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library HDD DVD-RAM Viewing Library data Introduction This section explains how to check and maintain the Library data. Viewing title information “Lock” Set the protection for the currently selected title. The protection icon “ ” appears. Title information e.g. CONTENT Title information MENU Title : 006 3CH 2006 3/26(Su) 2006/03/26 10:00pm TV:3 (2:06:32) Documentary/Culture(General) Original Chapter : 0001 (0:04:15) Note • When you change settings of a DVD-RAM disc, load the DVD-RAM disc. Viewing disc information Playback HDD Media : Quality : X P Mode : L P Rate : 2. 2 Audio : D/ M1 DVD Mode : Off 10:00 pm “Genre”: The submenu appears. Press / buttons to select a genre, then press ENTER button. A name of the selected genre and the icon appear. Recording 1) From Quick Menu, select “Title information” by / then press ENTER. You can view information about the selected title. Disc information 1) From Quick Menu, select “Disc information” by / then press ENTER. You can view information about the loaded disc. e.g. e.g. CONTENT Title information MENU CONTENT Disc information MENU 001 – Editing You can do the following operations with Quick Menu. (Press QUICK MENU button to display Quick Menu. Press / buttons to select an item and press ENTER.) Quick Menu Title : 006 3CH 2006 3/26(Su) Edit title name 2004/07/11 10:00pm TV:3 Edit chapter name Mode : LP Rate : 2. 2 Audio : D/ M1 DVD Mode : Off (2:06:32) Documentary/Culture(General) Original Chapter : 0001 (0:04:15) Original Titles 4 Playlist Titles 0 Remain Time (h:m) 1:51 (Current) S P 4.6Mbps / D/M1: 0:10 1) MN 6.6Mbps / L-PCM : 0:05 D/M1: 0:10 2) S P 4.6Mbps / D/M1: 0:22 3) L P 2.2Mbps / Finalize – D/M2: 0:07 4) MN 6.0Mbps / Video Create – D/M1: 0:15 5) MN 3.2Mbps / Increment Rec Possible Edit Disc Number Edit Disc Name Disc Status Normal Disc Lock Lock Off To change the number or name of the DVD-RAM disc: 1) Press / to select “Edit Disc Number” or “Edit Disc Name”, then press ENTER button. page 36, enter 2) Following the procedure on a new name for the disc. To change the disc number, press ADJUST button. Others “Del chapter name”: (Press PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button to display the chapter that you want to put a name for, and select the chapter.) “Record date & time”: The cursor moves to the date so that you can correct it. 135 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 135 Function setup “Edit chapter name”: (Press PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button to display the chapter that you want to put a name for, and select the chapter.) The on-screen keyboard appears. page 36, enter a new Following the procedure on name for the chapter. Record Time (h:m) Network Navi “Edit title name”: The on-screen keyboard appears. Following the procedure on page 36, enter a new name for the title. Disc Type DVD-RAM Writing Mode VR mode Library Del chapter name Record date & time Lock Genre HDD Media : Exit Mode : LP 10:00 pm 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library Viewing Library data (Continued) Maintenance of Library data The recorder usually controls the Library database system automatically. However, in the following cases, you must maintain and create data manually. Registering a disc manually 1) Load a DVD-RAM disc that contains information you want to add. 2) Press LIBRARY. • When you want to add information about a title, (for example when you use a DVD-RAM disc recorded on another device, etc.), to the Library system of the recorder. page 136). → “Registering a disc manually” ( • When the Library database memory is full. (Up to 3000 entries can be registered. When you reach this limit, a message will appear and further additions to the Library database will be rejected. Erase unnecessary data to make space.) → “Erasing unnecessary data” ( page 137). • When you want to rearrange the whole Library information from the beginning. → “Deleting all the Library information only” ( page 137). • When you save the Library data in another DVDRAM disc. → “Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc” ( page 138). • When you import saved Library data back into the recorder. page 138). → “Re-installing the backup data” ( Note • Save your Library data on a DVD-RAM disc. Importing Library data replaces all current database information in the recorder, including any data added after you saved the data onto a DVD-RAM disc. 3) Press QUICK MENU. 4) Press / to select “Library management”, then press ENTER. A submenu appears. e.g. Summary LIBRARY Title (All tTitles) MENU No. 1/ 2 Quick Menu Date Day Time DVD space remaining discSu no. 7:00 2004/all6/20 HDDDVD information 2004/ 6/19 Sa 11:00 HDDTitle Arrange HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00 Narrowing HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00 Jump 2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00 HDDDisc information 2004/ 6/13 Su 9:00 HDD Library management 6/11 Fr 9:00 HDD 2004/ Exit 5) Press / ENTER. 136 5/30 (Tu) 2:49 pm Title Name Add disc information pm 5 Del title 2004/06/20 07:00pm ... by disc ... 2004/06/19 11:00pm pm 4Del title information Delete all DVD-RAM information pm 3 2004/06/18 07:00pm ... Delete all library information 3 2004/06/17 09:00pm ... pm Delete disc no. from library 2004/06/13 11:00pm ... pm 2 Create backup 2004/06/13 09:00pm ... pm 4 Re-inst all backup pm L1 HDD 2006/03/15 We 9:00 pm L1 HDD 2006/03/14 Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc ... 2004/06/11 09:00pm ... 2006/03/15 09:00pm ... 2006/03/15 10:27pm ... to select “Add disc”, then press 6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. To cancel, select “No”. All title information is registered. Notes • To use title information in a DVD-RAM disc recorded on another device, as the Library data of the recorder, be sure to follow the procedure of “Registering a disc manually” to add saved data to the Library system. This information cannot be added automatically. • If you record content on a DVD-RAM disc on the recorder and edit the content on the other device, Library data of the disc may be lost or the disc may not function properly. • Unless a DVD-RAM disc is registered to the recorder, information of current or future titles recorded on the disc, will not registered. • By registering a disc manually, several discs in same number consequently may be registered. In this case, the remaining time is displayed per disc or page. Execution of “Edit Disc Number” ( page 135) is recommended. 136 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 CH Genre 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Deleting all the Library information only When the Library database is full (3000 entries).→ Select “Del title information”. Use this feature when you want to rearrange the whole Library information from the beginning. 1) Press LIBRARY. 1) Press LIBRARY. / to select a title. 2) Press QUICK MENU. 3) Press / to select “Library management” and press ENTER. 3) Press QUICK MENU. 4) Press / to select “Library management” then press ENTER. 6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. Library data of the title selected in step 2) is erased. 6) Press / to select “Yes” and press ENTER. Editing 5) Press ENTER. To cancel, select “No”. Playback 5) Press / to select “Del title information”, then press ENTER. 4) Press / to select “Delete All DVD-RAM information” or “Delete all library information”. Delete all DVD-RAM information: Deletes all Library information from a DVD-RAM disc, leaving the Library information on the HDD. Delete all library information: Deletes all Library information from the HDD and a DVD-RAM disc. Recording 2) Press Introduction Erasing unnecessary data To delete information of all titles in the specified data → Select “Del title information by disc”. Forced deletion of disc numbers 1) Press LIBRARY. / to select a title. 1) Press LIBRARY. 4) Press / to select “Library management” then press ENTER. 2) Press QUICK MENU. 5) Press / to select “Del title information by disc”, then press ENTER. To cancel, select “No”. 4) Press / to select “Del disc no. from Library”, then press ENTER. 5) Press ADJUST to select a number to delete, then press ENTER. Function setup 6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. Library data of all titles in the disc you selected in step 2) is erased. 3) Press / to select “Library management”, then press ENTER. Network Navi 3) Press QUICK MENU. Library 2) Press A number of an inactive disc can be deleted from the Library Management, so that it can be assigned to a new disc. Note • Deleting a disc number also deletes data of all titles in the disc. Others 137 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 137 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library Viewing Library data (Continued) Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc 1) Load a DVD-RAM disc to save the Library data. 2) Press LIBRARY. 3) Press QUICK MENU. 4) Press / to select “Library management”, then press ENTER. 5) Press / to select “Create backup”, then press ENTER. 6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. To cancel, select “No”. Re-installing the backup data 1) Load the DVD-RAM disc containing the Library database. 2) Press LIBRARY. 3) Press QUICK MENU. 4) Press / to select “Library management”, then press ENTER. 5) Press / to select “Re-inst all backup”, then press ENTER. 6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. To cancel, select “No”. Note • Do not use a DVD-RAM disc which contains Library Management data registered to another recorder for backup data storage. Library Management format may vary depending on the model. Adding data of a new format onto the saved disc may prevent the data of the older format from being re-installed. 138 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 138 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Library HDD DVD-RAM Checking remaining space Introduction You can check the remaining space of each disc prior to recording. Viewing a number and space of a disc DVD all disc no. Viewing remaining space DVD space remaining To recheck the remaining space for a different “User record quality” setting Note • You can rearrange the list by selecting “Arrange”, “Narrowing” or “Jump” from Quick Menu. Playback 1) Press QUICK MENU. Quick Menu appears. 1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD space remaining” by / then press ENTER. You can view the recording titles and the estimated space remaining per disc. 2) Press / to select “User record quality” then press ENTER. e.g. LIBRARY DVD All disc No. Summary MENU 1/ 2 User record quality 6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm Current defaul. Manual 6.6 L-PCM ––– DVD Name SP Manual Disc 6.6 L-PCM 4.6 D/M1Estimated HDD Setting 1 Custom setting vol.1 Spanish Conversation SpanishSetting ConversationMode vol.2 1 Manual Movie 2 SP Live Concert Rate 6.6 4.6 Audio quality L-PCM D/M1 3 LP 2.2 D/M1 4 Manual 6.0 D/M2 Editing No. 001 002 003 004 Recording 1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD all disc no.” by / then press ENTER. You can view numbers, names and estimated remaining spaces about all the registered discs. 20min. 10min. 5min. 2min. Manual 3.2 D/M1 5 Total recording time: approx. 71min. (with 4.7 GB unused) AV quality calculation can be changed from Quick Menu. Library 3) Press ADJUST and select the setting ( 183). 4) Press ENTER. page Network Navi Note • It is recommended that beforehand you select a desired title or disc by “arrange” selection then execute “DVD space remaining”, because the recorder lists the remaining space from the specified disc or the one which contains the specified title. Function setup Others 139 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 139 06.3.20, 4:16 PM RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p131-140 140 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Operate the recorder with a PC. What is Network Navi? Preparation for Network Navi 1: Connection to a PC 2: Recorder’s setup - Network Setting 3: Setting up the PC 4: Starting Network Navi 5: Network Navi settings Network Navi features Displaying thumbnails (Title List) Operating with the remote control screen Using Library information (Library) Setting for custom menu addition (Custom Menu Editor) Net Dubbing Net Monitor Setting a timer recording using email If you are having a difficulty with Network Navi features... RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 141 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network NetworkNavi Navi What is Network Navi? Network Navi can operate and set the recorder using a web screen. You need a PC that can be connected to the recorder with a Local Area Network (LAN). If you have an always-on internet connection, you can use email to remotely set a timer recording. Main features of Network Navi Flow of Network Navi setting Editing titles using a PC e.g.: Using Network Navi and a PC with an always-on internet connection (A connection of Network Navi to a PC with an always-on internet connection is recommended.) As in the “CONTENT MENU” of the recorder, this feature displays a list of content that were recorded on the internal HDD and DVD-RAM/R/RW. You can change general title information such as title names, chapter names and genres. (However, the information for a DVD-R/RW recorded by another device cannot be displayed or changed. The information on a finalized DVD-R/RW can be displayed but cannot be changed.) Checking the library using a PC This feature displays and sorts the recorder‘s “Library” information. It searches for a DVD-RAM which has empty space or desired disc by using stored information for each title such as disc number, recorded time and date, title name, and genre. Please read the information on operation, restrictions, and the disclaimer. ( page 143 144) You will need to understand the content and agree to the terms. You understood the content and agreed to the terms! Setting up the Network Navi system. page 145 - 146) • Connection to a PC ( Saving the DVD-Video menu background from a PC This feature allows you to save your favorite image from a PC to the recorder and use it as the menu background. Setting a timer recording using email • Recorder’s setup - Network Setting ( 149) • Starting Network Navi ( page 152) • Network Navi settings ( page 153) page 147 - This feature allows you to remotely set a timer recording using email. Use Network Navi ! ( page 154 - ) Operating the recorder from a PC This feature allows operation of the recorder from a PC. Streaming content to the PC (Net Monitor) Dubbing content to another Network Navi recorder on the network (Net Dubbing) The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. 142 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 142 06.3.20, 4:16 PM PC WWW browser The installation of Java VM Ver. 1.5 (for Mac OS X: 1.4.2) is required to use Network Navi features. To obtain the latest Java VM, check the website of Sun Microsystems, Inc. at http://www.sun.com/ (as of May 2005). Broadband always-on connection Note • Operating environment may change without advance notice. In addition, all operations are not guaranteed. 143 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 143 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others (Continued) Function setup • Operating Environment 1. OS (operating system): Windows® 2000/XP or Mac OS X (10.4). 2. DOS/V compatible PC or Macintosh computer (LAN connector required). 3. Internet browser: Internet Explorer (Windows®) or Safari (Mac OS). • All of the following environmental conditions are required for using “Timer recording setting using email”. 4. Always-on broadband internet connection. 5. Email account that can send and receive mail from the installation location (using a POP server and SMTP server). 6. Broadband router with hub (DHCP feature base is recommended). • The communication features of this recorder comply with the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3. • Certain factors including, without limitation, the available bandwidth and quality of your internet connection, and the connection between the recorder and your PC, may cause a delay and/or error in the displaying of content on your PC. Such delays and/or errors, if any, may be more pronounced when the recorder is connected via a wireless LAN. • Some Network Navi features may not be usable due to certain settings and/or restrictions set by the Internet service provider (ISP) supplying your broadband Internet connection. Network Navi Terminology and trademarks • Microsoft, Windows, and the Internet Explorer logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Windows® 2000...Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional operating system Service Pack3 (SP3) Windows® XP...Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system • The official name of Windows is Microsoft Windows Operating System. • Macintosh, Mac, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • The product names in this document may be used as trademarks or registered trademarks by each company. • Java and all Java-based marks are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. • Network Navi features can only be used when the recorder is in an operational state (excluding the confirmation feature of timer recording setting via email while in standby mode). Network Navi features cannot be used to turn on the power for the recorder (except when “timer recording feature” and “Auto Power OFF” are set). • Through connection to a PC, Network Navi features can be used to edit text information such as title names, chapter names, and program descriptions; change various settings; display thumbnails; and load background data contained in the DVD-Video menu. Obtaining, changing, and/or adding other information to content cannot be done. • Network Navi features, which are used through a connected PC, are not for video replay and image and audio data loading, editing, writing, and file transfer. • The included LAN cable (crossover cable) can be used to directly connect the recorder to a PC. For connection to a hub or router, use a separate, commercially available LAN cable (straight cable). Library Network connection environment Restrictions and Disclaimers Editing For Windows® : Internet Explorer 6.0 For Mac OS : Safari 2.0 Operation cannot be guaranteed for versions beyond the above. Before using Network Navi, please read and understand the important information in “Operating environment” and “Restrictions and Disclaimers.” Playback Windows® 2000/XP Mac OS X (10.4) Color monitor: 16-bit color or greater, 800 x 600 resolution or greater Required device: LAN port (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T) OS: Restrictions and disclaimers Recording The recorder complies with the 802.3 standard of IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers). The following environment is required to use the Network Navi features. Please check these conditions before connecting to a PC. Introduction Operating environment Network Navi What is Network Navi? (Continued) • Any fees charged by an ISP including, without limitation, connection charges and email charges are your responsibility. • If the broadband internet connection device (such as a Cable Modem or ADSL modem) specified by your ISP does not have a 10Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port, you will not be able to make a connection to the recorder. • An ADSL modem is required to use ADSL service and a cable modem is required to use cable modem service. Depending on the access method of and subscriber agreement with your ISP, you may not be able to use the Network Navi features contained in this recorder or you may be limited to the number of devices you can connect at the same time. • The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or its usage may be limited depending on the policies and restrictions of your ISP. For details, contact your SP directly. • For “Timer recording setting using email” or "Timer recording setting by cell phone email," a separate email account is required that is connectable from your home, and compatible with POP3 or APOP. An email account that is not accessible from home, such as a cell phone email address, cannot be used in connection with this recorder and the aforementioned Network Navi features. • An always-on broadband internet connection is necessary for the recorder to access the ISP's mail server via the same network. It is not necessary for a connected PC to be powered on for the recorder to be able to connect to the mail server. • In some cases, a connected PC may be set to automatically receive email from a mail server and delete such email on the server at the time of its receipt, in which case, it is possible that a timer recording set via email may be deleted before the recorder receives it. In such case, it is recommended that you make the appropriate setting changes so that a copy of each incoming email remains on the server. • To set a timer recording by email using a cellphone, use internet email. Email systems between cellphones, such as text messaging services, cannot be used to set a timer recording on the recorder. • A webmail or web portal (incompatible with POP3) cannot be used to set a timer recording by email. • Use a category 5, 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX LAN cable when connecting to a PC with a broadband always-on internet connection. Use the included crossover cable when connecting the recorder directly to a PC. • Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the settings of such software, certain features contained in this recorder may not be usable. Note: Toshiba is not responsible for any malfunction of the recorder and/or the Network Navi features due to communication errors/malfunctions associated with your broadband internet connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment. In the event that any content intended to be recorded fails to be recorded and/or any content intended to be edited fails to be edited due to any of the aforementioned reasons, please contact your ISP and/or PC manufacturer. 144 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 144 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Preparation for Network Navi Introduction Follow the procedures 1 to 4 to use Network Navi. 1: Connection to a PC Direct connection to a PC Recording A PC with a LAN connection is required. The main method for PC connection is either a direct connection or through a constant and continuous (“always-on”) internet connection. Usable features differ depending on the connection method. The features of “Network Navi” can be utilized fully only if the recorder is connected using a PC with an always-on internet connection and router. Always-on internet connection with a PC Playback Phone line Editing Broadband modem The following can be done from the PC Library The following can be done from the PC Editing the title information (Title Thumbnail List) • Editing the title information (Title Thumbnail List) • • Checking the Library (Library) Setting the theme for menu screen (DVD-Video Tool) • Checking the Library (Library) • Setting the theme for menu screen (DVD-Video Tool) • • Operating the recorder (Virtual Remote Control) Streaming content to the PC (Net Monitor) • Operating the recorder (Virtual Remote Control) • Streaming content to the PC (Net Monitor) The following settings are required. Connecting to the PC ( • • Setting up the Network Setting ( page 151) Setting up the PC ( • Starting Network Navi ( The following settings are required. page 146) page 147) page 152) • Connecting to the PC ( page 146) • Setting up the Network Setting ( page 147) page 152) • Starting Network Navi ( • Network Navi Settings ( page 153) (Continued) Function setup • Network Navi • Others 145 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 145 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Preparation for Network Navi (Continued) Back view of the recorder LAN(10/100) Regarding the cable used: • When connecting directly to this recorder, use the included LAN crossover cable. • When connecting using a router, use a commercially available LAN straight cable (category 5/CAT5). Direct connection to a PC To LAN(10/100) port Crossover cable To LAN (Ether) port Connecting to a PC using a router (e.g. ADSL) ADSL modem (Router, internal type) Router ADSL modem Phone line Phone line To LAN (Ether) port To LAN (Ether) port Straight cable To LAN (Ether) port To LAN (Ether) port Caution • When plugging or unplugging the LAN cable, switch off the power of the recorder and the PC. • When plugging or unplugging the LAN cable, hold the plug portion of the cable. • When unplugging, do not pull on the LAN cable but unplug while pressing down on the lock. • Do not connect the modular phone cable to the LAN port. • Since there are various connection configurations, please follow the specifications of your telecommunication carrier or internet service provider. While pressing down 146 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 146 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Lock portion Plug Introduction 2: Recorder’s setup - Network Setting Recording 1 While stopped, press SETUP. The setup screen will be displayed. SETUP DVD player settings DVD disc menu language English ENTER , and Editing Management settings Network Setting Genre setting Front Display 3 / Playback 2 Select “Management settings” by press ENTER. On ff Select “Network Setting” by ENTER. / , and press The “Network Setting” screen will be displayed. Library ENTER Start Network Navi 4 Following the table on the next page, set each items on the “Network Navi”, “Address/Proxy” and “Mail Setting” screen. Network Setting Network Navi Address/Proxy Mail Setting N t D bbi Select a tab to change screens. Function setup Network Navi Settings Recorder Name RD-XS54 User Name Password 80 Port number S tti “User Name” and “Password” must be entered to prevent unauthorized access. The username and password should be unique so that others cannot guess them easily. The setting cannot be completed unless the username and password are entered. Others 5 After the setting is completed, select “Save” and press ENTER. The settings will be stored. Start the setup for the PC. 147 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 147 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Preparation for Network Navi (Continued) Note: Toshiba recommends that you take the following minimum general security precautions in connection with choosing a User Name and Password in connection with the Network Navi features of the recorder: • Choose a unique User Name and Password that would be difficult for someone else to guess (e.g., do not use the same password that you use for your email account, router, etc.). • Do not share your User Name and Password with anyone. Items for setting (Network Navi screen) Network Navi Settings Recorder Name Up to 15 single-byte alphanumeric characters or symbols Normally there is no need to change this setting. When multiple units of the recorder are connected, make changes for each unit. User Name Up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters or symbols This is an ID to access the recorder from a PC. Select a username that is unique and not known to or easily guessed by others. (Example of usernames to avoid: your name or your family’s name, telephone number, birth date, street number of address, and car license plate numbers, as well as repetition of the same number or symbol.) Password Up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters or symbols This is a password to access the recorder from a PC. Select a password that is unique and not known to or easily guessed by others. (Example of passwords to avoid: your name or your family’s name, telephone number, birth date, street number of address, and car license plate numbers, as well as repetition of the same number or symbol.) When the password is entered, the characters are displayed as “ * ”. If you forget the password, enter a new password. Port Number 80 Normally there is no need to change this setting. When the connection cannot be made or a feature is not operating, change the value to a number between 2000 and 10000. Accept Select this setting when multiple Toshiba HDD & DVD video recorders are connected to the network and dubbing is done to and from various equipment. Reject This will not allow dubbing through the internet. e.g.: TOSHIBA This sets the group name when multiple units are connected to the network. Net Dubbing Settings Request from another device Group Name Group Password This sets the password when a group name is set. Items for setting (Address/Proxy screen) When directly connecting to a PC DHCP Manual IP Address If the IP address of the PC is This sets a different address within the same subnet of the PC 192.168.1.10. connected to the recorder. e.g.: 192.168.1.15 Network information will be manually set. Subnet Mask e.g.: 255.255.255.0 This sets the subnet mask of the network environment that will be connected. Default Gateway e.g.: 192.168.1.1 This is set when the recorder uses a gateway. DNS Manual Fixed to “Manual” if “DHCP” is set to “Manual”. DNS Server e.g.:192.168.1.1 Manually enter the DNS server address. There is no need to set in this case. Proxy Server Proxy Port 80 There is no need to change in this case. MAC Address (Unable to set) The MAC address that is established for each recorder is displayed. It cannot be changed. Connection Check* It checks the connection of the recorder and the PC. Note: Please disregard the message regarding DNS server if it is displayed after “Connection Check” is pressed. * When “Connection Check” is pressed, items that were changed on the “Address/Proxy” and “Mail Setting” screens will be saved, and you will not be able to return to the previous setting. Keeping a record of the setting is recommended as a precaution. Note • Private IP address can be set. (e.g.: 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.254) When using a PC with an always-on internet connection and directly connecting via router DHCP Auto This automatically obtains network information. IP Address (Setting unnecessary) The IP address that is obtained from the DHCP server is displayed. Subnet Mask (Setting unnecessary) The subnet mask that is obtained from the DHCP server is displayed. 148 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 148 06.3.20, 4:16 PM (Setting unnecessary) The default gateway that is obtained from the DHCP server is displayed. DNS, DNS Server Auto When “Use” is selected, the DNS server address is automatically obtained from the DHCP server. Introduction Default Gateway Manually enter the DNS server address. Up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters or symbols Enter the proxy server address when your provider requires proxy setting. Proxy Port 80 Normally there is no need to change this setting. When required, change the value to a number between 1 and 65535. MAC Address (Unable to set) The MAC address that is established for each recorder is displayed. It cannot be changed. Connection Check* This checks the connection between the recorder and the router. Note • Please contact the router manufacturer when the router DHCP feature is not operating properly (in such a case, an error will occur since the default gateway and the DNS server IP address cannot be obtained). Playback * When “Connection Check” is pressed, items that were changed on the “Address/Proxy” and “Mail Setting” screens will be saved, and you will not be able to return to the previous setting. Keeping a record of the setting is recommended as a precaution. Recording Manual Proxy Server Items for setting (Mail Setting screen) This will disable the use of the mail function. Enable This will enable the use of the mail function. Mail Keyword e.g.: rdstyle This sets 6-20 single-byte alphanumeric characters so that the email for the mail function can be recognized. Symbols should not be used since they will cause error and timer recording setting by email will not be successful. POP3 Server Address e.g.: XXX.XXX.com This sets the POP3 server address. (Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters.) POP3 User Name This sets the username for accessing the POP3 server. Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters. POP3 Password This sets the password for accessing the POP3 server. Enter up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters. APOP Only one email address is set as the sender. All No specific email address is set as the sender. From e.g.: XXXXX@XXX.XXX.com When “Accept” is set to “Only”, enter the email address of the sender up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters. Completion Notice Disable Email notification is not sent when timer recording setting by email is completed. Secondary Address When timer recording setting by email is completed, notice is sent to the completion-notice contact address. Return to sender When timer recording setting by email is completed, notice is sent to the email sender’s address. Secondary Address and sender When timer recording setting by email function is completed, notice is sent to both completion-notice contact address and the email sender’s address. SMTP Server Address e.g.: XXX.XXX.com This sets the SMTP server address.** Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters. Sender Address e.g.: XXXXXXX@XXX.XXX.com This sets the email address of your internet provider’s email service. Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters. Secondary Address e.g.: XXXXXXX@XXX.XXX.com This sets the email address for sending notice when timer recording setting by email is completed. Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters. • Depending on the recorder’s operating mode, the timer recording setting may not be successful. * APOP: Password encrypting POP. For details, consult your ISP. ** The address of “POP3 Server Address” will be copied if you leave here blank. 149 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 149 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others This disables the use of APOP (Authenticated POP*). Only Accept Function setup This enables the use of APOP (Authenticated POP*). Disable Network Navi Enable Library Disable Editing Mail Function Network Navi Preparation for Network Navi (Continued) Setting example - Sender of timer recording setting mail and receiver of completion notice e.g. homeadd@yyy.zzz.com e.g. mobileadd@yyy.zzz.com Timer recording Completion notice setting mail from: received at: Settings Mail Function Enable Mail Keyword abc1234 POP3 Server Address yyy.zzz.com POP3 User Name xxxx Select “Return toaaabbb sender”. POP3 Password Accept Only Completion Notice APOP Return to sender yyy.zzz.com SMTP Server Address Sender Address homeadd@yyy.zzz.com Secondary Address Mail Function Enable From homeadd@yyy.zzz.com Connection Check Enable Mail Keyword abc1234 POP3 Server Address yyy.zzz.com POP3 User Name xxxx Select “Secondary Address”.APOP aaabbb POP3 Password Accept Only Completion Notice From homeadd@yyy.zzz.com Secondary Address yyy.zzz.com SMTP Server Address Sender Address homeadd@yyy.zzz.com mobileadd@yy... Connection Check Secondary Address Mail Function Enable Enable Mail Keyword abc1234 POP3 Server Address yyy.zzz.com POP3 User Name xxxx Select “Secondary Address aaabbb APOP POP3 Password and Sender”. Accept Completion Notice Only From mobileadd@yyy.zzz.com Secondary Address and Sender SMTP Server Address Sender Address Secondary Address yyy.zzz.com homeadd@yyy.zzz.com homeadd@yyy... Connection Check 150 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 150 Enable 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction 3: Setting up the PC Setting up the PC (when directly connecting to the PC) Editing When setting has been previously established, keeping a record of the original setting prior to any changes is recommended so that it can be changed back. Playback 1 “Control panel” → “Network connections” → click “Properties” of “Local area connection” → click “Properties” of “Internet protocol (TCP/ IP)”. Select “Use next IP address” to set the IP address and subnet mask. Notes • If you are connected to the internet, you may not be able to connect if you specify the IP address. Change to the original settings when connecting to the internet. • When using Mac OS X, open “Apple Symbol” → “System environment setting” → “Network” → “TCP/IP”. Set the setting method to “Manual input” and enter the IP address and subnet mask. Recording Settings for the PC will be different depending on the operating system. Please read the user’s manual of your PC for details. The following instructions are for Windows® XP. When using the PC with an always-on internet connection, the setting is normally already at “Auto” (automatically obtained IP address). Therefore, no change in setting is required. Proceed to “4: Starting Network Navi”. If “Network Navi” does not start, change the setting for the recorder according to the setting of the PC “TCP/IP properties”. Library q w Network Navi 1 “IP address”: Set to 192.168.1.10. Function setup (Set an IP address that should be different from that of the recorder.) 2 “Subnet mask”: Set to 255.255.255.0. Others 2 Click “OK” on the screen. After clicking “OK”, follow the instructions on the PC. It may be necessary to restart your PC. Proceed to “4: Starting Network Navi”. Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. 151 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 151 06.3.20, 6:51 PM Network Navi Preparation for Network Navi (Continued) 4: Starting Network Navi Start Network Navi to set up/operate the recorder using a PC. The following instructions are for Windows® XP. 1 Launch the internet browser to start using the Network Navi on the PC. Screen images of Windows® Internet Explorer are used as examples in this user’s manual. When the “Back” button on the browser is used to return to the previous page, the setting and display may not be set correctly. 2 Enter the address http://RD-XS55, and press the ENTER key of the PC. For Mac OS X or when access cannot be made using the address with the recorder name, press SETUP on the remote control. Then enter the IP address on the “Network Setting” screen of “Management Settings” for the recorder instead of the recorder name. (e.g.: http://192.168.1.15/) When the address is entered, the Main Menu will be displayed. A screen will be displayed for entering “User Name” and “Password” which were established during the network setup of the recorder. Enter the “User Name” and “Password”. If you want to set your favorites or bookmarks in the browser, it should be done at this time. 3-A 3-B When connecting directly to the PC: Click the desired feature from the Main Menu. When connecting to the PC with an always-on internet connection: Click “Network Navi Settings” from the Main Menu. Follow the instructions on the pages that follow to establish the settings. Notes • For some routers, the assigned IP address may change frequently depending on DHCP. • To check the IP address of the recorder using the router management software, find the assigned IP address that matches the MAC address displayed on the “Address/Proxy” screen of “Network Setting”. • If the “Port number” under “Network Setting” is set at a value other than “80”, enter the “Port number” after the recorder name or IP address. (e.g.: For a port number of 2000, use http://RD-XS55:2000/.) • If the proxy setting is made, accessing may fail. • When the recorder is in operation, you might not be able to make the setting even if you can use the Network Navi. 152 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 152 06.3.20, 6:51 PM Introduction 5: Network Navi Settings Settings for Network Navi features of the recorder. Recording 1 Click “Setup Menu” on the Main Menu. Playback Click 2 Click the item to be set and select the value or enter the data. 3 Click “Save” after the setting is completed. Editing For the content to be set, see below. Library The settings are saved. Click Program Description Include This allows program descriptions to be included when saving Library information to a CSV file. Exclude This saves to a CSV file without program descriptions. Function setup Set up for exporting CSV File Format Network Navi Note • When there is a change in the environment of the destination, such as when connecting to the PC for the first time, redo the “Network Setting” ( page 147) on the recorder. Other Settings www3.toshiba.co.jp/dvd/mtn/ This sets the address of the maintenance service page, from which you can download update software of the recorder. Access Port Number Normally set to 1048 It can be set between 1048 and 1999. When multiple units are used and the remote-control screen freezes in Internet Explorer or Netscape, change the numbers of each unit. Net Monitor Settings See page 164. 153 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 153 06.3.20, 6:51 PM Others Upgrade page address Network NetworkNavi Navi Network Navi features Displaying thumbnails (Title List) ........................................................ 155 Operating with the remote control screen .......................................... 157 Net Keyboard .................................................................................................................... 158 Operation using the Virtual Remote Control ...................................................................... 159 Using Library Information (Library) ..................................................... 160 Finding the disc containing the title you want to view (Sorting Library information) ........... 160 Viewing title information .................................................................................................... 160 Making file output of Library information to a PC ............................................................... 160 Displaying a list of remaining space by each disc number (Disc List) ................................ 160 Setting for custom menu addition (Custom Menu Editor) ................. 161 Net Dubbing ........................................................................................... 163 Dubbing to a device on the same network ......................................................................... 163 Net Monitor ............................................................................................. 165 Setting a timer recording using email ................................................. 168 Setting a timer recording by directly specifying the date, time, and channel ..................... 168 Useful features of timer recording setting using email ....................................................... 169 If you are having a difficulty with Network Navi features .................. 170 154 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 154 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Displaying thumbnails (Title List) When the “Title List Editor” is clicked in the Main Menu, the thumbnails and information of the titles recorded on the HDD, DVD-RAM, or DVD-R/RW will be displayed. The title information such as the title names and genres can be changed*. It will take some time for them to be displayed. 1 Recording * • A DVD-R/RW (Video Mode) that was recorded on another device cannot be displayed or changed. • A finalized DVD-R/RW can be displayed but cannot be changed. When the “Title List Editor” is clicked in the Main Menu, the thumbnails and information of the titles recorded on the internal HDD, DVD-RAM, and DVD-R/RW will be displayed. Playback Editing To change pages, click “ top of the window. ” or “ ” at the If you click on the thumbnail or “Title Name” of a title you want to change or view its information, the Chapter List screen will be displayed. Library Points on thumbnail display Settings are the same as those on the list. When the recorder is in operation (such as in play mode), changes cannot be made. (In the following situations, the thumbnails may become black or may not be displayed.) • Recorder’s operating mode (such as in play mode) Copy-once title and chapter thumbnails • Title thumbnails and chapter thumbnails recorded on DVD-R/RW (Video mode) Network Navi • 2 Function setup A program which has never had a thumbnail display on the recorder will appear as a black screen on the PC and the thumbnail display will not be shown. In such a case, make changes to the thumbnail screen using the “Content Menu” on the recorder. (There are thumbnails which cannot be displayed.) For a Macintosh computer, Chapter List will not be displayed even if the thumbnail is clicked. Click on the “Title Name” of a title that you want to change or view its information. The title details and chapter list will be displayed. The area that can be changed will be in a window which will accept text input. Others 155 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 155 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) 3 4 Click on an item that you want to change, and select a value or input data. For the content of settings, see the following “Items for setting”. After the setting is completed, click “Save”. Click. The title information will be set. When you click “Return before saving the change”, the content of the setting will not be changed and you will return to the title list display. Items for setting Title Name This allows you to name the recorded title. Enter up to 64 single-byte letters. Date This allows you to set the year, month, day, and start time of the recording. Genre Lock This allows you to set the genre of the recorded program. Lock This protects against unintentional deleting or editing of the recorded title. Unlock This does not protect the recorded title. Program Description This allows you to add an explanation of the program material. Enter up to 800 single-byte letters, including line breaks and spaces. Chapter Name This allows you to name the chapter. Enter up to 64 single-byte letters. Notes • Changes cannot be made while the recorder is in operation (such as in play mode). • The program description cannot be saved in a Playlist. 156 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 156 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Using this feature, you can operate the recorder using a PC just like using the remote control included with the recorder. The remote control and the display area are shown on the right side and the bottom of the same window as Network Navi. Playback Click Click on a button on the remote control screen. Editing 2 Recording 1 Click “Virtual Remote Control” on the Main Menu. Introduction Operating with the remote control screen The remote control screen will operate in the same way as when you press a button on the regular remote control. Library Notes • The displaying of the remote control screen may take some time. • This feature may not work depending on the disc. • The recorder response to the remote control command may take time depending on the recorder’s operating mode and communication condition within the network. • If the remote control screen is not displayed properly, clear the browser’s cache. • If you use multiple units of the recorder within the same network, you will need to set up a different “Port Number” for each unit. Network Navi View of the display area e.g. Title elapsed-time Function setup Title Chapter TIME SLIP Others Note • The display content will renew every second. 157 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 157 06.3.20, 6:52 PM Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) View of the Virtual Remote Control Main panel Sub panel If you click on this area, the remote control will open and close. Switch between the Main panel and Sub panel by clicking these areas. Net Keyboard If the recorder’s character input window is started while the Virtual Remote Control is displayed, the Net Keyboard screen will be displayed on the PC. If you enter using Net Keyboard and click “Enter”, the Net Keyboard will close. This will be reflected in the recorder’s character input window. Note • If you click “Cancel” on the Net Keyboard, the Net Keyboard will close. This will not be reflected in the recorder’s character input window. 158 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 158 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Operation using the Virtual Remote Control You can have remote control operations using the mouse of a PC. Using the Virtual Remote Control If the remote control screen is starting up, begin the setup after the screen has finished displaying. 1 Click “Setup Menu” on the Main Menu. Operate the mouse within the frame of the remotecontrol screen. Recording Setting up the Virtual Remote Control Playback 2 Click on the “Setup for Virtual Remote Control” button. A setup screen for the remote control will appear. Editing Note • If you setup the Virtual Remote Control while the display of the remote control screen is activated, you will need to restart the remote control screen and then operate the Virtual Remote Control. Turning the recorder on/off by the Virtual Remote Control Note • If the recorder’s power is turned off on the recorder, any Network Navi operation opens the Main Menu, on which only the power button is available. Function setup Click the power button of the Virtual Remote Control. The indicator of the button shows the recorder status. (on: green, off: red) Network Navi Notes • Enter under “Threshold value of a scroll wheel“ the number of rotations of the wheel when you are using a mouse. • In “Customization Menu for the Virtual Remote Control”, set the recorder’s operation for each mouse usage time. • The Virtual Remote Control requires the installation of Java VM v. 1.5 (1.4.2 for Mac OS X). To check the Java version which is available, click on the “Confirmation of Java software version” button in the lower right of the screen. The recorder will operate according to the setup of the Virtual Remote Control. Library 3 Change the setting to desired operation that is done through a mouse to suit your needs. 4 Click “Save”. Operate by using the mouse pointer within this frame. If you click outside of this frame, the device will not operate. Others 159 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 159 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) Using Library information (Library) Like in the “Library”, you can easily find a disc with remaining space or a desired disc by using stored information for each title such as the recorded time and date, where it is recorded, the title name, and the genre. In addition, Network Navi can make a CSV-format file output of the Library information to a PC. 1 Click “Library” in the Main Menu. The information for each title will be displayed in a list. To change the page, click “ ” or “ ” in the window. Finding the disc containing the title you want to view Arranging Library information Click on the names of the items that you want to arrange. When you click “Media”, “Title Name”, “Ch”, “Date”, “Day”, “Time”, “Genre”, or “Remain Time”, the items will be rearranged. (However, the HDD remaining time will be displayed as “– – –”.) Notes • There may be some differences between the results of the sorting mentioned here and those in the recorder’s Library. • Library Narrowing, a feature of the recorder, cannot be done here. • When the settings for “Recalculation of remaining space based on Quality” are changed, the remaining space will change corresponding to the changed settings for recorded AV quality. • The settings displayed under the recalculation of remaining space can be changed in “AV record quality”. Searching a title by specifying a keyword Enter a keyword and ckick “Searching”. Titles containing the keyword in their names are sorted. To cancel, Click “Cancel Narrowings”. Viewing title information Click on the title name. Note • You cannot change the title information here. Making file output of Library information to a PC Click “Save in the CSV title format”. Library information will be saved in CSV format. Follow the instructions on the PC screen, and perform the steps for saving. Note • Saving in CSV format is done at the initial stages of the Library display. The results of Arrange will not be reflected. Displaying a list of remaining space by each disc number (Disc List) Click “Disc List”. For all DVD-RAM information saved on HDD or the recorder, a list of remaining space on each disc will be displayed according to disc number, disc name, and recorded AV quality. Every time you click on the number, disc name, remaining space in the index, you can sort the list with the clicked line as reference. Notes • The remaining space on the disc will not be displayed unless the disc is saved on the recorder. • The settings for remaining space which are displayed as 15 can be changed in “AV record quality”. • When you click “Media”, “Title Name”, “Ch”, “Date”, “Day”, “Time”, “Genre”, or “Remain Time”, you can perform a Narrowing of the data that you clicked. • For the Arrange, the results will be saved for the previous three sorts. The title information will be displayed. 160 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 160 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Setting for custom menu addition (Custom Menu Editor) When creating a DVD-R/RW, this feature will allow you to set and add 16 types of images that are separate from the 8 types of custom menu which initially came with the recorder. 1 2 Click “Custom Menu Editor” in the Main Menu. 3 Select “Use a background for Title/Chapter”, “Color”, or “Transparency”. Playback • If the format is the same, you can save an image from Mac OS as is (72 dpi). • Since PC and TV display images differently, an image which appears normal on the PC may appear elongated on the TV. An image will appear normally on the TV and can be used as a background if you first create an image on the PC that is 640 x 480 pixel size, then elongate this image horizontally to 720 x 480 pixel size. Recording You will need: Images that you want to use on the menu screen (Windows bitmap format (bmp),*1 24 bit color, 720 x 480*2 pixels (72 dpi)) The Custom Menu Editor screen will be displayed. Editing Specify the bitmap file that you want to use for a custom menu. You can click “Browse” to select the file. You can enter the “Menu Name”. You can also save it without entering a name. Library Network Navi Function setup Use a background for Title/Chapter: Items such as the disc name, title name, and chapter name may become more difficult to read depending on the background image. In such a case, set the background for the title/ chapter to “Yes”. Color: This sets the background color for the title/chapter. Others Transparency: This sets the degree of transparency for the background of the title/chapter. The larger the number, the more transparent the background of the title/ chapter, and the background image will be more visible. 161 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 161 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) 4 Select “Font Color”, “Cursor Position Color”, and “Cursor Enter Color”. Font Color: This is the font color for items displayed on the menu such as disc name, title name, chapter name, page number, and title/chapter time. The “Return” button that goes back to the title menu will have a white background with a black frame regardless of the setting. Cursor Position Color: The color that will be shown when you navigate the title menu. Cursor Enter Color: The color to be shown when you execute (i.e. press ENTER). 5 Click “Save”. The user custom menu that was set will be sent to the recorder. The set custom menu will be displayed towards the bottom of this screen. Deleting the user custom menu Select “Number” and click “Delete”. To use the saved user custom menu on the recorder Click on the “Next” button in “Title Menu Select” and “Chapter Menu Select” under “DVD-Video Create”. Display and select the saved user menu. If you select “Prev” you will return to the preset menu. 162 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 162 06.3.20, 4:16 PM You can perform dubbing by designating equipment (Toshiba’s HDD & DVD video recorder) on the same network as the dubbing destination. Net Dubbing can also be performed in “Dub Select Items”. HDD MENU Device select Device name B Original HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD DVD DVD DVD DVD Dub To: DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD Start A Dub Selected Items Select a destination for dubbing, and then a display will appear on the screen. The display will show the devices within the network that can be specified as a dubbing destination (up to 8 devices). / , then 3 Select the destination for dubbing using then press ENTER. Dubbing will begin. / , 163 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 163 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others 2 Select a network device name using press ENTER. Multiple devices cannot be selected. Notes • This feature is available only for models that are compatible with Net Dubbing. A drive that was not expected at the release of the recorder may be recognized in the future. In such a case, the drive column may show a number such as #5 when connecting to a future model. This is not a malfunction. After you check which drive it is, perform the dubbing. In addition, there may be some future model in which dubbing may not be supported to some drives. • In Net Dubbing, only copying can be done. Therefore, dubbing cannot be done for copy-prohibited titles and chapters of copy-once programs. • A DVD-R/RW (Video mode) cannot be used as a dubbing destination or origin. • Net Dubbing is a feature of High speed dubbing. Rate conversion dubbing cannot be done. • Net Dubbing will be interrupted if a timer recording starts during Net Dubbing. Redo Net Dubbing after the completion of the timer recording. • When using the Net Dubbing feature, noises may occur on images received by the recorder’s tuner and external input due to the increase in data access of the network. Usage of Net Dubbing is recommended when recording from these inputs is not being performed. Function setup RD-Z1 TAKASHI TARO_1 TARO_2 Source will be Title. TARO_3 CHIHIRO MIRINA LOVE Capacity Title Searching Dubbing Media Network Navi Selected EDIT Dub Items Library 1 Select a part to copy/move on “Edit Menu”, then press QUICK MENU. Select “Change media to NET” from “Quick Menu”, then press ENTER. When you first select the part that you want to dub and then switch to the dubbing destination, a message will be displayed. If you do not want to cancel the selected part, choose “No”. You can use a setting to automatically shut off the power after dubbing is completed. (You cannot use this setting for the device that is the dubbing destination.) During the dubbing, press QUICK MENU and select “Auto Power OFF” using / , then press ENTER. Even if you selected “Auto Power OFF”, the power may not switch off for certain cases such as when a timer recording has started. Editing Dubbing to a device on the same network Playback The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Recording The following conditions are required to use this feature. • The model must be compatible with Net Dubbing. • It must have the same subnet connection as the recorder (such as by being connected to the same router or being directly connected to each other by a crossover cable). • The setup is done in “Net Dubbing Settings” under Network Setting. - Set “Request from another device” to “Accept”. - Give a “Group Name”. (All devices that you want to dub must be set with the same group name.) - Set a “Group Password”. (All devices that you want to dub must be set with the same password.) These devices must be in the following conditions. 1 Their power is on. (Insert a disc if applicable.) 2 They are in stop mode. Introduction Net Dubbing Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) Directly connecting Net Dubbing compatible models By directly connecting with the Net Dubbing compatible device, you can dub without the network environment. It is necessary to set the compatible device’s IP address to an address that is different but within the same subnet as the recorder’s. Recorder Net Dubbing compatible device To LAN port To LAN port LAN cable (crossover type, included) 1 Make the “Network Setting” on Setup as in the example below. page 147. • DHCP: Not used (both for the recorder and compatible) • IP Address 192.168.1.10 (IP address of the recorder) 192.168.1.15 (separate compatible device) • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 (for both the recorder and compatible device) • Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1 (for both the recorder and compatible device) • DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 (for both the recorder and compatible device) 2 Select “Save” to save the settings. If you want to abort the copy/move 1 Press QUICK MENU while the copy/move is in process. “Quick Menu” will be displayed. 2 Select “Cancel Dubbing” using ENTER. / , then press Notes • If you abort copy/transfer, the portion being dubbed will be deleted at the dubbing destination. • For DVD-R, there will be reduced space from any amount of content that has already been written even though the process may have been aborted. 164 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 164 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Average bit rate: Caution • The operation of Net Monitor is not guaranteed on all PCs. In addition, Net Monitor is not guaranteed to work for future versions of QuickTime®. If you set the average bit rate to high, you will have a better image than if you set the monitor window image to low. However, the data transfer may be unstable due to the communication load. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. 3 Click on the “Save” button. The content of the setting will be saved in the browser. Starting Net Monitor 1 Click on the “Net Monitor” icon in the Main Menu. The window of “Net Monitor” will be displayed. The image will be displayed after the QuickTime® startup screen is shown for 3-8 seconds, depending on the buffering time that was set. The following settings are required to use Net Monitor. Network Navi Net Monitor Settings When transferring audio and video data from the recorder to the PC, a streaming format is used. For streaming, you will need to set the wait time (buffering time). The time will be set according to the processing speed of the PC and the network environment. If the images do not play properly, adjust the buffering time. Library Note: Certain factors including, without limitation, the available bandwidth and quality of your internet connection, and the connection between the recorder and your PC, may cause a delay and/or error in the displaying of content on your PC. Such delays and/or errors, if any, may be more pronounced when the recorder is connected via a wireless LAN. Buffering time: Editing Note • The features of Net Monitor are to be used on a PC that is connected within the same subnetwork as the recorder. If multiple PCs are connected to one recorder, the features of the Virtual Remote Control and Net Monitor can be used on only one PC. Set the speed of the data transfer from the recorder to the PC. Playback The following conditions are required to use Net Monitor. • QuickTime® (v 7.0.2) must be installed on the PC connected to the recorder. Recording A TV program which is being broadcasted or has been recorded can be viewed on a PC that is connected to the recorder. (In other cases, Net Monitor may not operate normally.) Net Monitor can be used to stream content (live tuner or recorded content) from the recorder to the PC for viewing in your home office. Introduction Net Monitor Viewing using Net Monitor 1 Click “Setup Menu” in the Main Menu. Set the monitor window size of Net Monitor. 165 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 165 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Size of Video window: Compared to TV, the images in the monitor window of Net Monitor will be displayed with a few seconds delay depending on the setting of the buffering time. Therefore, please note that if you perform chapter editing while watching something in the monitor window of Net Monitor, the edited material may be divided at different location compared to what was intended. Function setup 2 Establish the settings for “Net Monitor”. Use “Virtual Remote Control” when operating the recorder using Net Monitor. While using Net Monitor, you can operate the recorder with the buttons on the recorder or remote control which is included with the recorder. 1 Click on the “Virtual Remote Control” button. The same operation can be performed as when pressing the buttons of the recorder’s remote control. Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) View of the monitor window Since an image that is displayed in the monitor window is more compressed than that on TV, the image will be less clear. The following conditions will be displayed in the monitor window. If the screen size is set small and the condition display message is long, a part of the message may not be displayed. “Preparing”: The monitor window is started, and it is preparing for a display. “Monitoring”: This indicates that the monitor is running. “Net Monitor” is not available”: It indicates the unavailability of the monitor. Please read the section “On ‘Net Monitor is not available’ due to recorder conditions”. • The screen may temporarily lock if you click on the monitor window with a mouse. To release, double click or close the monitor window and then reopen. • If a monitor window size over 900 x 600 is set, a separate window opens to display images from the recorder. Notes • The aspect ratio displayed in the monitor window is 4:3. • The screen in the monitor window displays a wider area than that of a TV. Therefore, the outer area may flicker. • If you close the Virtual Remote Control or browser during monitoring, the monitor window will also close. • You can view the monitor window for up to 9 continuous hours. After 9 hours, the monitor will stop temporarily and then it will resume automatically. • If you make changes to the “Network Setting” using the recorder, the monitor will stop temporarily, and then it will resume automatically. • If you display the monitor window while the recorder is displaying the PinP screen, the PinP screen will terminate. In addition, the PinP feature will not be usable while the monitor window is displayed. • If the program that is broadcasting is a bilingual program, Net Monitor will output the main audio to the L channel and auxiliary audio to the R channel regardless of the sound multiplex setting. • When you play the title that was recorded using a dual-monaural setting on the recorder, the audio output will follow the sound multiplex setting during the play. • If a firewall is set on a PC connected to the recorder, the PC may not accept the audio-visual data. In such a case, cancel the firewall setting on the PC or set the “Streaming Transport” of QuickTime® Player to HTTP. • If “RTSP Proxy Server” is set in the QuickTime® Player’s “Streaming Proxy” setting, operation may not occur properly in some cases. • In the monitor window, the mouse and keyboard shortcuts of QuickTime® Player are available, but the shortcuts of some features are not available. • Quick Time is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. 166 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 166 06.3.20, 4:16 PM On “Net Monitor is not available” due to recorder conditions Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is now Rate Conversion Dubbing) Recorder condition: DVD-Video menu creating Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is creating a “DVD-Video menu”) Conditions: Broadcasting a copy-once or copy prohibited image; playing a copy prohibited image on a disc, previewing of a copy prohibited title, playing of a copy prohibited title on the editing screen Net Monitor is not available (Detected a copy prohibited signal) Recorder condition: CD playing Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is playing) Recorder condition: during DV recording on GUI displaying Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is displaying the GUI for recording from a DV device) Recorder condition: In the process of switching power off or the power is off Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is powered off) Recorder condition: Line-U is selected Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder’s input is selected as Line-U) Recorder condition: Playing 96 kHz Audio of a DVD-Video Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is playing DVD-Video with an audio contents at an unsupported rate -96kHz) Recorder condition: DVD-Video finalizing Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is finalizing a DVD-Video) Recorder condition: Dubbing to the HDD Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is dubbing to the internal HDD) Recorder condition: Net Dubbing Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder’s GUI is displaying the Net Dubbing screen) Editing Recorder condition: Rate Conversion Dubbing Playback Net Monitor is not available (The connected recorder is currently recording) Recording Monitor window message Recorder tuner conditions: 15 seconds before the timer recording, in Timeslip mode, during timer recording, or during regular recording. Introduction A message will be displayed and viewing of the monitor cannot be done under conditions such as the following: The recorder condition Net Monitor Help Check the following items if Net Monitor is not operating properly. Are the following compatible with Network Navi (Net Monitor): The OS used, browser type and version, and Java VM version? → DOS/V compatible device: OS: Windows 2000/XP Browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 Java VM: Ver. 1.5 → Macintosh: Check the setting of “Streaming Proxy” of QuickTime® Player. Select RTSP: In some cases Net Monitor does not operate properly if “RTSP Proxy Server” is setup. Network Navi ® Select HTTP: In the case where a firewall is set up on your PC, the image will be transferred properly from the recorder to the PC if you select this option. → Check the network connection: Confirm that the Network Navi features can be used properly. Confirm that the recorder and PC are within the same subnet. OS: Mac OS X (10.4) Function setup → Check the browser setting: Browser: Safari 2.0 Confirm that Java is usable in the set browser. Java VM: Ver. 1.4.2 • Monitor window image shakes or stops. • Do you have the correct version and settings of the installed QuickTime®; the correct connection between the recorder and PC network; and the correct setting of the browser in use? For both Windows® and Mac OS, check to see if QuickTime® 7.0.2 is installed. → QuickTime® setting: → Set the window size smaller. → Check the bit rate and buffering time that was set: The settings must be made in accordance with the PC connected to the recorder and network environment. In some cases, if you setup according to the processing speed of the PC, you may be able to view properly during a replay or broadcast. Check the setting of the “Streaming Transport” of QuickTime® Player. 167 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 167 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others → QuickTime® version: Library • Select UDP: This is normally selected. Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) • Toshiba is not responsible for any damage or loss caused directly or indirectly by the failure of the recorder to record content intended to be recorded. • Toshiba is not responsible for, nor has any control over, any content recorded and/or viewed using the recorder. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Setting a timer recording using email You can remotely set a timer recording using email. Preparation • Connect the recorder to the internet, and turn on the power of each equipment. • Set the “Mail Setting” under “Network Setting”. • Change the mail software setting to text format. (Timer recording setting by email is not compatible with email in HTML format.) • A trial run of timer recording setting by email is recommended to test its operation before an actual run. Setting a timer recording by directly specifying the date, time, and channel 1 Enter the email destination (To:). Enter the “Sender Address” that was set in “Mail Setting”. e.g. XXXXXXXX@XXX.XXX.com 2 Enter the content of a timer recording in the body of the email. Enter text in single-byte letters. (Both capitalized and non-capitalized letters can be used.) * Omissible. Enter a space between each item. * e.g. open rdstyle prog add 04012006 1100am 0130pm CAT125 SP SH l l l l l l l l l l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 No. Category Character 1 Header open 2 Keyword (same keyword from Setup menu) 3 Description prog 4 Description add 5 Date(Month/Day/Year) mmddyyyy 6 Start time (0100-1259) hhmmam/hhmmpm 7 End time (0100-1259) 8 Program CH hhmmam/hhmmpm TV 2–69 9 10 Recording Quality Media CATV CAT1–125 C.BOX CBX0–999 Satellite box SAT0–9999 * Line in L1, L2, L3 SP SP SP-Audio SPA MP MP LP LP EP EP SEP SEP EXP EXP EXP-Audio EXPA XP XP XP-Audio XPA User User HDD SH DVD SD When not specified, the recorder selects “HDD” as the recording media, “SP” as the recording quality. For the other recording settings, the setup menus are referred to. Notes • Depending on the software for sending timer recording setting email, a part of the first line may go to a new line if it is long. If this occurs, timer recording setting content will not be read correctly. • If there is an excessively large number of email messages on the mail server, the timer recording setting email may not be received. • When the recorder does not have an always-on internet connection, timer recording setting using email cannot be done. • In some cases, a timer recording might not be possible depending on the start time of the timer recording and the recorder’s operating mode. • An email account compatible with POP3 or APOP is required as a destination of timer recording setting email. You cannot use an account such as a cell phone email address in which you cannot send or receive email from your home PC. • If you receive email using a PC which is set to automatically delete email from the mail server, the recorder may not receive the timer recording setting email. • Only one timer recording setting can be done per email. • If an email message begins with the same format as the timer recording setting email, it may be regarded as a timer recording setting email and may be received by the recorder instead of the PC. • If the email timer recording keyword is entered incorrectly, you will not be able to set a timer recording. In addition, if a symbol is part of the email timer recording keyword, it will cause an error. Therefore, you will not be able to set a timer recording. * Input by 3 or 4 digits according to the setting ( page 44, INSTALLATION GUIDE). If not, the timer recording will not be executed. 168 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 168 06.3.20, 4:16 PM The recorder receives timer recording setting email on the POP server at 15-minute intervals. When setting is successful (setting completion email) • The remaining space on the internal HDD can be checked using email. Enter the following in the body of the email. e.g. open rdstyle prog remain Remaining space Editing When the recorder receives the timer recording setting email, you can receive email that notifies you of setting completion or setting failure. Make the following settings. • Set “Completion Notice” to “Secondary Address and sender”, “Return to sender”, or “Secondary Address”. Check remaining space on HDD using email Playback Note • The recorder cannot receive timer recording setting email while displaying a GUI on a connected TV. Therefore, a prolonged GUI view on the TV may cause failure in timer recording setting using email. Recording Receiving timer recording setting email Notes • If there is an error on the recorder side, you will not be able to set a timer recording. • The following are possible errors: - The start time of the recording is less than 15 minutes from the present time. - The end time of recording is more than 15 minutes from the present time and the start time was more than 8 hours ago. • Email cannot be sent or received while the GUI is displayed on the TV screen connected to the recorder. Introduction Useful features of timer recording setting using email Note • Enter only single-byte letters as text, and enter a space between each item. Library If “Completion Notice” is set to “Secondary Address and sender” or “Secondary Address”, enter the email address (secondary address) at which you would like to receive the notice in “Secondary Address”. When setting is successful e.g. Network Navi The timer recording from the e-mail was saved correctly. Date: Sun 4/3/06 Start Time: 01:00am End Time: 02:00am Channel: CBX015 mailto: email address (email address set in Network Navi Setting)?subject = subject line (delete timer recording setting of RD XS55.)&body=open%20password (password set in Network Navi Setting)%20prog&20del%20setting ID(ID of the timer recording setting) Function setup When setting is unsuccessful Others You will be notified of the reason for not being able to set the timer recording. 169 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 169 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Network Navi Network Navi features (Continued) If you are having a difficulty with Network Navi features... The following are Network Navi features each of which must be set for proper operation. Complete the basic settings as in the table below, and then make appropriate changes to the settings. If the Network Navi features are not operating, check the settings again to make sure all inputs are correct. Network Navi Features Operating Environment/Basic Settings Network Navi • OS:Windows® 2000/XP Mac OS X(10.4) • JAVA VM Ver.1.5 (For Mac OS X: 1.4.2) Required Settings • Network Setting • OS:Windows® 2000/XP Mac OS X(10.4) • JAVA VM Ver.1.5 (For Mac OS X: 1.4.2) Virtual Remote Control • Other settings – Port Number • Network Setting • OS:Windows® 2000/XP Mac OS X (10.4) Net Dubbing • Network Setting • OS:Windows® 2000/XP Mac OS X (10.4) Setting a timer recording using email • Settings for Net Dubbing – Set “Request from another device” to “Accept”. – Enter a group name. (Set the same group name for all the devices that you wish to dub.) – Enter the group password. (Set the same password for all the devices that you wish to dub.) • Mail Setting • Network Setting – An always-on connection environment is required. • OS:Windows® 2000/XP Mac OS X(10.4) • Internet Explorer 6.0 (Safari 2.0 for Mac OS X) • Java VM Ver.1.5 (For Mac OS X: 1.4.2) Net Monitor • Installation and settings of QuickTime® (v. 7.0.2) • Settings for Net Monitor • Network Setting 170 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p141-170 170 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Function setup You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference. Customizing the function settings RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 171 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Function setup HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Customizing the function settings You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference. 1 Press SETUP. The following setup display appears. SETUP e.g. DVD player settings DVD disc menu language English DVD audio language English No subtitle DVD subtitle language DVD d i l O 2 Press / to select the icon of a group that contains a desired item, then press ENTER. SETUP For details on each setting, see the next page. e.g. When “Display settings” is selected: ENTER e.g. Display settings TV shape 4:3LB On On screen display 25% Transparency Startup screen On Screen protector On Background Blue Closed caption TV SETUP 3 Press / ENTER. to select a desired item, then press ENTER Start 4 Refer to the explanations on pages beginning from 176, to change the selection by / or other buttons, then press ENTER. ENTER Notes • SETUP button is available even during normal playback. However some items may be grayed out and they cannot be selected. In this case, try again after playback is stopped. • SETUP button is not available during recording, Recorded Title Play, Chase Play or Pause TV modes. 5 • To select another item in the same group, repeat steps 3 to 4. • To shift to another group, press O button then repeat steps 2 to 4. Press SETUP. SETUP The setup display disappears and the setting is completed. 172 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 172 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Details Page DVD player settings DVD disc menu language To select a preferred language for disc menus. 176 To select a preferred language for the sound track. 176 To select a preferred language for subtitles. 176 To turn on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier to hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour playback. 177 To turn on or off the vocal output during DVD KARAOKE disc playback. 177 DVD-VIDEO DVD parental lock To turn the parental lock function on or off. 177 To turn on or off a feature that automatically stops playback after a title has been viewed. 178 To select the resolution of still pictures. (Field/Frame) 179 To select the black level of playback pictures. 179 To select from standard or three customized picture settings. 179 To customize picture quality settings and store them. 179 To select the system of output signal. (Only when connected to a PROGRESSIVE TV.) 179 To select a setting for playback at a reduced noise level. 180 To select an output sound format corresponding to your system connection. 180 To turn on or off expansive virtual surround sound effects from just two speakers. 180 To monitor and record SAP broadcast. 181 Introduction Setting DVD-VIDEO DVD-VIDEO DVD subtitle language Recording DVD audio language DVD-VIDEO DVD dynamic range control DVD-VIDEO Playback Karaoke vocal DVD-VIDEO DVD title stop DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Editing Picture/Audio settings Pause/Still HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Output Black level DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD Custom picture select Library HDD HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD Progressive conversion HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD Audio out select HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R CD DVD-VIDEO VCD HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO SAP (Continued) 173 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 173 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Virtual surround Function setup Play DNR Network Navi Custom picture setting Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) Setting Details Page Display settings TV shape To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV. 181 To activate or deactivate the operational status display (e.g., ) on the TV screen. 181 To select the transparency of the on-screen menus relative to background pictures. 181 Startup screen To turn on or off the start-up screen setting that makes the background picture appear automatically when turning on the power. 181 Screen protector To turn the screen saver on or off. 181 Background To select a display status when no video signals are present. 182 Closed caption To select where you turn on or off closed caption. 182 To turn on or off the confirmation beeper announcing when each remote command is received. 182 To select whether or not a buzzer sounds when dubbing and certain functions are finished. 182 IR code To switch the remote control codes that operate the recorder. 182 Instant skip interval To set the time interval to skip when INSTANT SKIP button is pressed once. 182 To set the time interval to go back when INSTANT REPLAY button is pressed once. 183 To select the position of the thumbnail image counting from the beginning of the title that has been recorded. 183 To activate resume play per title or continuous play. 183 To select an interval of still picture display. 183 To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture) files and MP3/WMA (audio) files. 183 HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO On screen display HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R CD DVD-VIDEO VCD Transparency HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R CD DVD-VIDEO VCD HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R CD DVD-VIDEO VCD Operational settings Operation beep HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R CD DVD-VIDEO VCD Completion beep HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R CD DVD-VIDEO VCD Instant replay interval HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R CD DVD-VIDEO VCD Title thumbnail point HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R HDD/RAM title play HDD DVD-RAM Still group interval DVD-RAM Priority contents 174 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 174 06.3.23, 9:00 AM Setting Details Page DVD recorder operation To select picture and sound quality settings for a manual program recording. 183 To make further settings when you cannot adjust the image quality with “Custom picture setting” of the “Picture/audio settings”. 184 To select the black level of recording pictures. 184 To set the aspect ratio for DVD-R recording. 184 To set the audio for DVD-R recording. 184 To set whether or not chapters are to be automatically created at a specified interval for DVD-R recording. 185 To activate or deactivate the 3D digital noise reduction. 185 To activate or deactivate the 3D digital filter to execute Y/C (Brightness/Color) separation. 185 To turn on or off a function that will automatically switch recording from a DVD-RAM disc to the HDD when there is less than 10 minutes of space available on the DVD-RAM disc or when there is no disc loaded. 185 Network Setting To set a recorder for the Network Navi function. 147 Genre setting To register the frequently used genre on the menu. 186 Front Display To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby mode. 186 HDD auto stop To turn on or off a power saving function that stops the HDD after a certain period of inactivity. 186 To delete all the titles recorded on the HDD, leaving the Library information on a DVD-RAM disc. 186 To initialize the HDD. 187 To perform physical formatting of a DVD-RAM disc. 35 To reduce the mechanical noise during High speed dubbing. page 100 – 105) ( 187 HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Picture record mode HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Input Black level HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-R DVD compatible mode HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-Video:CHP create DVD-RW DVD-R HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R 3D Y/C separation HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Relay recording HDD DVD-RAM Editing Management settings DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R HDD All HDD titles delete HDD format HDD DVD-RAM physical format Network Navi HDD Library HDD Playback Rec DNR Recording Aspect ratio (Video mode) DVD-RW Introduction User record quality DVD-RAM HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Version (Main/DVD drive) To display the version of the software. The version is only displayed and cannot be set. Function setup DVD Drive speed setting Initial settings To select a preferred language for on-screen displays (except TV Guide On Screen). 187 Time & Date setting To set the clock of the recorder. 187 Guide and Clock reset To correct the clock of the recorder. 187 Set Top Box setting To control channels of a connected satellite set top box from the recorder. 187 175 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 175 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Language Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) DVD player settings DVD disc menu language e.g. DVD-VIDEO DVD player settings DVD disc menu language English DVD audio language English DVD subtitle language No subtitle DVD dynamic range control On Karaoke vocal Off English: To display disc menus in English. French: To display disc menus in French. 1) Obtain the language code of the preferred language from the Language Code List ( page 195). Spanish: To display disc menus in Spanish. SETUP Others: To make a further language choice. After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4) below. e.g. DVD player settings DVD disc menu language English English DVD audio language No subtitle DVD subtitle language DVD dynamic range control On Code E N Code E N 1) Obtain the language code of the preferred language from Language Code List ( page 195). 2) Select the first character by pressing / buttons (or ADJUST button). 3) Press / buttons to shift. Select second character by pressing / buttons (or ADJUST button). 4) Press ENTER button. Note • Some DVD video discs may be played in a different language from that you selected. A prior language may be programmed by the disc. SETUP 2) Select the first character by pressing / buttons (or ADJUST button). DVD subtitle language 3) Press / buttons to shift. Select second character by pressing / buttons (or ADJUST button). English: DVD-VIDEO To display subtitles in English. French: To display subtitles in French. 4) Press ENTER button. Spanish: To display subtitles in Spanish. Note • Some DVD video discs may not include your preset language. In this case, the recorder automatically displays disc menus consistent with the disc’s initial language setting. DVD audio language No Subtitle: To disable subtitles. Others: To make a further choice. After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4) below. e.g. DVD-VIDEO English: To play sound tracks recorded in English. French: To play sound tracks recorded in French. Spanish: To play sound tracks recorded in Spanish. Others: To make further choices. After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) - 4) below. DVD player settings DVD disc menu language English DVD audio language English DVD subtitle language No subtitle DVD dynamic range control On Karaoke vocal Off 1) Obtain the language code of the preferred language from Language Code List ( page 195). SETUP 2) Select the first character by pressing / buttons (or ADJUST button). 176 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 176 Code – – 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction DVD parental lock 4) Press ENTER button. DVD dynamic range control Off: The DVD Dynamic Range Control does not function. The DVD Dynamic Range Control functions. Karaoke vocal Select this to activate Parental Lock function or to change the setting. After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 3) below. Off: Deactivate the Parental Lock function. After pressing ENTER button, follow steps 1) below. 1) Enter a 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER button. If you make a mistake entering your password, press CLEAR button before pressing ENTER button, and re-enter the correct password. 2) Press / / / buttons to move the cursor. Then press ADJUST button to enter the code of a country/area whose standards were used to rate a DVD video disc, referring to the list below. Network Navi Notes • This function is available only for a disc recorded in Dolby Digital format. • Depending on the disc you play back, the actual effect of this function differs. On: Library On: • Depending on discs, it may not be evident whether the disc is compatible with Parental Lock function. Make sure that Parental Lock function you set is activated correctly. Editing DVD-VIDEO Turns on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier to hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour playback. Important Playback Notes • Some DVD video discs may be set to display subtitles in a different language from that you selected. A prior subtitle language may be programmed by the disc. • Some DVD video discs allow you to change subtitle selections only via the disc menu. In this case, press MENU button and choose the appropriate subtitle language from the selection on the disc menu. DVD-VIDEO DVD video discs equipped with the Parental Lock function have a predetermined limitation level. The limitation level or limitation method may differ depending on the disc. For example the whole contents of a disc may not be played back, or an extreme violent scene maybe cut or replaced automatically by another scene. Recording 3) Press / buttons to shift. Select the proceeding character by pressing / buttons (or ADJUST button). DVD-VIDEO (Continued) Function setup Off: The main vocal sound is not output. On: The main vocal sound is output. Others Notes • This function is available only for a DVD KARAOKE disc recorded in Dolby Digital Multi Channel format. • If you want to enjoy KARAOKE function, connect an amplifier or other such device to this recorder. 177 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 177 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) Country/Area AUSTRALIA BELGIUM CANADA CHINA CHINA HONG KONG DENMARK FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY INDONESIA ITALY JAPAN MALAYSIA NETHERLANDS NORWAY PHILIPPINES RUSSIAN FEDERATION SINGAPORE SPAIN SWEDEN SWITZERLAND TAIWAN THAILAND UNITED KINGDOM UNITED STATES Code AU BE CA CN HK DK FI FR DE ID IT JP MY NL NO PH RU SG ES SE CH TW TH GB US To change the limitation level of Parental Lock function Follow step 1) - 3) above. To change the password 1) Press STOP button 4 times after selecting “On” and “Off” in order, and then press ENTER button. The password is cleared. 2) Enter a new 4-digit password by using the number buttons. 3) Press ENTER button. DVD title stop DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Off: Plays back all following titles on the disc after the current title has been viewed. On: Recorder is stopped after playback of current title being viewed is completed. 3) Select the desired limitation level by pressing / buttons, and then press ENTER button. e.g. DVD parental lock level setting Area code U S Level 8 Prohibited Level 7 Allowed Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 SETUP Unless the Parental Lock function is set to “Off”, a disc that has a higher limitation level than your selected limitation level cannot be played back. For example, if you select level 7, discs exceeding level 8 are locked and cannot be played back. When “US” is selected, its limitation level corresponds to the following settings. Level 7 : NC-17 Level 3 : PG Level 6 : R Level 1 : G Level 4 : PG13 178 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 178 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Picture/Audio settings Pause/Still HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Normal setting. Pause the moving image without blurring. Frame: Displays high resolution still image. Output Black level HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD You can adjust the black level of the output signal. Standard: Normal black level. Enhanced: Note • This function is not available when the HDMI connection is used. Editing To display deeper, richer black than in “Standard” setting. Playback Brightness (0) Darker ⇔ Brighter (14) Contrast (–7) Lower ⇔ Higher (7) Color (–7) Duller ⇔ Brighter (7) Tint (–7) Red ⇔ Green (7) Edge Enhance Soft/OFF/Sharp Gamma OFF/1/2 3) After adjusting the items, press ENTER button. Note • This setting is not available when the HDMI connection is used. DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD Select from between 4 picture settings (Normal, Setting 1-3) you stored in the memory. Library Custom picture select HDD Progressive conversion HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD Custom picture setting Auto: DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD 1) Press / button to select a desired setting from 3 settings, and then press ENTER button. e.g. The DVD player filters video signal, and converts it in the progressive output format appropriately. Suitable for playback of video content pictures. Film: Setting 1 Setting 2 Setting 3 SETUP The DVD player converts film content pictures in the progressive output format appropriately. Suitable for playback of film content pictures. The progressive output feature will be most effective under this selection. Note • Depending on a disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. 179 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 179 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Picture/Audio settings Pause / Still Auto Output Black level Standard Custom picture select Normal Custom picture setting Auto Progressive conversion Play DNR Audio out select Bitstream Virtual surround Off SAP Off Video: Function setup You can adjust fine picture quality and store up to 3 custom picture settings in the memory of the recorder. Select this position normally. The DVD player automatically detects source content, film or video, of playback source, and converts that signal in the progressive output format in an appropriate method. Network Navi Note • This setting is not available when the HDMI connection is used. There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed. HDD Recording Auto: 2) Press / buttons to select adjustable items, and then press / buttons to select each parameter. Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) Play DNR HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Analog 2ch: VCD Selects a setting for playback at a reduced noise level. Press / buttons to select an item then select “On” or “Off” using / buttons. 3D-DNR: Select this when a TV or other audio device is connected to this recorder via the ANALOG output connectors. PCM: Select this when a 2ch digital stereo amplifier is connected to this recorder. When you play a disc recorded in Dolby Digital, MPEG1 or MPEG2 format, the sound is converted to the PCM (2ch) format and output. Off: Not activated. On: Reduces the noise levels of brightness signals and color signals present in the video signal during playback. Mosquito NR: Off: Not activated. On: Reduces mosquito (flicker) noise occurring in the contour sections of images. HDMI-Auto: Select this when an HDMI compatible device equipped with a Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder is connected to this recorder. When you play a disc recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS format, the sound is output in the bitstream format. If the connected HDMI device does not support Dolby Digital or MPEG, the recorder outputs sounds in the linear PCM format. If it does not support DTS, the recorder outputs no sounds. Block NR: Off: Virtual surround Not activated. HDD On: Reduces noise that appears in the form of blocks (block noise) in a portion of the screen during playback of images with rapid movement. DNR is the abbreviation for Digital Noise Reduction. Notes • DNR effects vary depending on the disc. • Detailed images may no longer be visible depending on the scene due to the effects of DNR. • Depending on the disc or scene, “On” may produce undesirable picture artifacts or increase noises on contours. In this instance, select “Off.” Audio out select HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Selects an output sound format corresponding to your audio system connection. For details about output sound selection, see 192. page Bitstream: Select this when an amplifier equipped with built-in Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG1 decoder is connected to this recorder. When you play a disc recorded in Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG1 format, digital audio signal is output. DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO This lets you playback discs with acoustic effects having greater depth and presence even when using only two speakers. Off: Virtual surround effect not activated. On: Virtual surround effect activated. Notes • This function is only activated when playing back a disc recorded with Dolby Digital. • This function is only activated when “Audio Out Select” is set to “PCM” if the BITSTREAM/PCM jack of this DVD recorder is connected to an amplifier or similar device. • When the virtual surround effect is activated, Dolby Progressive Sound may be deactivated or sound differently than usual. • When the virtual surround effect is activated, the volume may sound differently than usual. • Set “Virtual surround” to “Off” if the audio sounds distorted. Manufactured under license from QSound Labs, Inc. U.S. patent Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and 5,440,638 and various foreign counterpart. Copyright QSound Labs, Inc. 1998-2002. QXpanderTM is a trademark of QSound Labs, Inc. All rights reserved. 180 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 180 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Display settings TV shape SAP Off: The main sound is received. HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO Select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV. For details on this setting, see “TV shape setting” ( page 48, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). Recording SAP (Second Audio Program broadcast) is separate audio program, usually broadcast in a second language with the main language. On: SAP sound (second language) is received. On screen display DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Off: Deactivates the operational status display (e.g., the TV screen. ) on Playback HDD On: Activates the operational status display (e.g., the TV screen. ) on HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Editing Transparency Selects the transparency of the recorder’s on-screen menus and its relationship to the background image. 0% : 25% : 50% Library Startup screen Off: The startup screen is not displayed. Network Navi On: The startup screen appears automatically when turning on the power. Screen protector DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD To reduce TV screen damage (image burn), this function disengages the pause mode of a playback image. The display returns to the normal TV screen when the recorder remains idle for more than 15 minutes. In time slip mode, the playback pause is released. (Continued) 181 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 181 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others If this function is set to “On”, the recorder, if freezes, may return to the normal by leaving it for about 15 minutes or longer. Function setup HDD Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) Operational settings Operation beep Off: Deactivates the screen protector function. On: Activates the screen protector function. Note • Toshiba does not guarantee that this function protects the TV screen by all means. HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Turn on or off a confirmation beeper announcing when a command is received. Off: Turns off the beep sound. On: Turns on the beep sound. Background Selects a screen color when receiving no video signals such as selecting a non-broadcasting channel. Note • You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this setting. Off: No color. Completion beep Black: HDD Black is displayed. DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R This is used to set whether or not a buzzer sounds when dubbing and certain functions are finished. Blue: Blue is displayed. Off: Buzzer does not sound. Important • Depending on signal reception, the Background setting may be cleared. To prevent this, set this function to “Off”. Closed caption To select where you turn on or off closed captioning. Off: To disable closed caption. TV: Closed caption data is decoded on the connected TV. To turn on or off closed caption, operate the connected TV. Recorder: Closed caption data is decoded on this recorder. You cannot turn off closed caption on the connected TV. Notes • While the recorder is sending signals in the progressive output format, closed caption is disabled regardless of this setting. • Depending on the signal condition, closed caption may not be displayed properly. In this case, select “Off.” On: Buzzer sounds. Note • You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this setting. IR code Switches the remote control codes to operate the recorder. If you use the second and third TOSHIBA HDD/ DVD video recorders, set the different remote codes for each recorder to avoid confusion in the response of the recorders. For details about this setting, refer to “Operating the second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video recorders with the remote control of this recorder” ( page 52, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). DR 1 : DR 2 : DR 3 Instant skip interval HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD Sets how much time is skipped when INSTANT SKIP button is pressed. 5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min. 182 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 182 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction DVD recorder operation User record quality Instant replay interval HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO VCD CD 5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min. DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R You can select from 5 combined picture and sound quality recording settings prior to actual recording. Actual selection applied becomes the default setting for normal recording or programmed recording. e.g. Title thumbnail point HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R 0 sec. : 3 sec. : 10 sec. : 35 sec. : 1 min. : 5 min. Note • Thumbnails can also be changed to other scenes. See page 126. HDD Setting 1 Manual 6.6 L-PCM Custom setting Setting Mode 1 Manual 2 SP DVD SP Rate 6.6 4.6 ––– 4.6 D/M1 Audio quality L-PCM D/M1 3 LP 2.2 D/M1 4 Manual 6.0 D/M2 Manual 3.2 D/M1 5 Total recording time: approx. 71min. (with 4.7 GB unused) SETUP Editing • To make a combination of picture and sound quality settings. 1) Press / / / buttons to select the desired item (“Mode”, “Rate”, or “Audio quality”). HDD/RAM title play HDD User record quality Playback For recorded titles, sets how far a scene from the start is set as the title thumbnail. Recording Sets how far back is replayed when INSTANT REPLAY button is pressed. HDD DVD-RAM Sets the resume play per title. Title resume: Serial playback: 1) Press / / / buttons to select a media to record on (HDD or DVD). 2) Press ADJUST button to change the setting. You can confirm the available recording time for the selected setting on the bottom screen. 3) Press ENTER button. Still group interval DVD-RAM 1 sec. : 2 sec. : 3 sec. : 5 sec. : 10 sec. : Default Priority contents Photo: JPEG files take priority over MP3/WMA files. Audio: MP3/WMA files take priority over JPEG files. Note • If this selection does not correspond to disc contents, the recorder will take a longer time to start playback of the disc. 183 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 183 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture) files and MP3/WMA (audio) files. Function setup Sets an interval for display of still pictures (in seconds) when playing back a collection of still images. Notes • A combination of picture and sound quality settings can be set for the HDD and a DVD-RAM disc respectively. • You can change the combination of picture and sound quality settings also by displaying Quick Menu on LIBRARY MENU or in stop mode, then selecting “User record quality”. Either of the above methods updates the setting of this recorder. • If you set “SP” or “LP”, you cannot select “L-PCM”. • Depending on the sound quality settings, the upper limit for the picture quality setting differs. • You can adjust the manual rate for picture quality by 0.2 Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (You cannot set the rate from 1.0 to 2.0.) Network Navi You can play back titles (Original, Playlist) stored in the HDD or a DVD-RAM continuously. Because there is no division between titles, the recorder remembers only the last point where you stopped playback. • To apply the combination of picture and sound quality settings. Library Remembers the point where you stop playback. Allows you to resume the playback from that point. 2) Press ADJUST button to change the setting of each item. Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) Aspect ratio(Video mode) Picture record mode HDD DVD-RW DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-R Adjusts problems with the brightness of video signals of TV broadcasts or other external input. To set the aspect ratio when recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc. Press / buttons to select the source, and to select the mode. 4:3: / buttons (Only use this setting when you cannot adjust the brightness satisfactorily with the Custom picture setting in page 179) of this recorder.) Picture/Audio settings ( Important: • This setting changes the video signal to record and the recorded signal is not returned to the original state even when this setting is changed after recording. When duplicating from a VHS tape, if you can check the video recording state beforehand, we recommend first playing back for a while and checking the overall brightness tendency, then setting an appropriate mode. Standard: The brightness of signals received with this recorder and external input signals are adjusted automatically. This is normally the setting to use. Mode 1: This setting is used to record the signals darker when the screen is too bright. Mode 2, 3, 4: As the number rises, the signals are recorded brighter. Use these modes to adjust the brightness. Input Black level HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R You can adjust the black level of the input signal. Standard: Fixes the aspect ratio at 4:3. 16:9: Fixes the aspect ratio at 16:9. Note • When the bit rate on “User record quality” is set to “1.0(Mbps)” and “1.4(Mbps)”, pictures are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio even if “16:9” is selected. DVD compatible mode HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R To set whether or not recording is to be performed in the format for which recording is allowed by the DVD-Video standard (video, audio and other data) during recording. This selection is important for contents when recorded on this recorder, if they will be copied to DVD-R/RW. Off: For recording of contents which will not be copied to a DVD-R/RW disc. Both the main and SAP sounds are recorded. When recording directly on a DVD-R/RW disc, this is ineffective. The recorder will automatically regard this as “Main,” and record sound of the main channel only in stereo. Select “Main” or “SAP” for DVD-R/RW recording. Main: Records sound of the main channel only in stereo. Normal black level. SAP: Records sound of the SAP channel only in stereo. Enhanced: Brighter black level than in “Standard” setting. Notes • When you select the manual rate of the picture quality between 3.0 and 3.8 and set this mode to “Main” or “SAP”, the picture quality may become lower than when you set this mode to “Off”. • You can change the setting from Quick Menu. • It is no use to make this selection when dubbing. Select when recording. 184 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 184 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction DVD-Video:CHP create DVD-RW Relay recording HDD DVD-R Off: Chapters are not set. 5 min. : 10 min. : 15 min. : 20 min. To set the interval at which chapters are automatically created to 5, 10, 15 or 20 minutes. Turn on or off a function that makes a recording automatically onto the HDD when the remaining space of a DVD-RAM disc is reduced to less than 10 minutes or when a disc is not loaded. Off: Deactivates this function. On: Rec DNR DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R Selects the level of 3D digital noise reduction that can reduce picture noise depending on the scene. Off: Deactivates the 3D digital noise reduction. Editing HDD Notes • The Relay recording does not function during Rate Conversion Dubbing or Line-U Dubbing. • During playback of the HDD when you start Relay recording and CONTENT MENU is displayed, playback stops. • During Relay recording, HDD Title Playback is not available. • When the remaining space on the HDD is small, Relay recording does not function. • Time slip function ( page 69) is not possible while “On” is selected. Playback Activates this function. Note • The number of chapters has the upper limit, which varies depending on the disc condition. If the number reaches it, no more chapters are created. Recording To set whether chapters are to be automatically created at a selected interval during DVD-R/RW recording. DVD-RAM On: Library Sets the normal level. Expanded: Increases digital noise reduction. Network Navi Notes • When you set “Rec DNR” to “On” or “Expanded” and set “3D Y/C Separation” to “On”, the priority changes depending on the input selection if you select the S-video input. “Rec DNR” has priority, when you select the built-in tuner or composite input, “3D Y/C Separation” has priority. • If you want to avoid an afterimage, set this setting to “Off”. 3D Y/C separation Function setup HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R The 3D digital comb filter executes Y/C (Brightness/ Color) separation to reduce the color irregularity or cross color interference. Off: Deactivates this function. In an area where the broadcast reception is poor, select this mode. Others On: Activates this function. In normal conditions, select this. Note • Refer to the “Notes” in the above “Rec DNR”. 185 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 185 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) Management settings Network Setting See “Network Navi” ( HDD auto stop HDD page 147). Off: Turns off the HDD auto stop mode. Genre setting HDD On: DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R This registers a frequently used genre name onto the menu. Genre names registered here are displayed in the “Genre” on Quick Menu. 1) Press / buttons to select a position in the “Current Genre List” you want to change, then press ENTER button. A list of genres appears. You can turn the pages using Turns HDD drive off after recorder is idle for approximately 5 minutes. When PLAY or REC button is pressed for the HDD while the HDD drive is turned off, it takes a little longer time to play or record. All HDD titles delete HDD button. 2) Press / buttons to select a genre, then press ENTER button. This deletes all the titles on the HDD. Only the recorded contents are deleted, so a DVD-RAM disc Library information and reservation history are left as is and can continue to be used. A list of genre names appears. 3) Press / buttons to select a genre name, then press ENTER button. The selected genre name replaces the previous All titles are about to be deleted in spite of title protected. Proceed? Yes No one of the position you selected at step 1). 4) Repeat steps 1) to 3) to register genre names. 1) Press / buttons to select “Yes”, then press ENTER button. 5) When genre names are registered, press O button to return to “Management Settings” menu. 2) Confirm the message, press / buttons to select “Yes” and then press ENTER button. Deletion of all titles starts. If you want to cancel the deleting, select “No”. Front Display To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby mode. Off: Note • If you periodically execute All HDD titles delete, this holds down fragmentation (increased complexity) of the disc and maintains good operability. Sets the front panel display to turn off in the standby mode. On: Sets the front panel display to turn on in the standby mode. 186 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 186 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Initial settings Language HDD format To set a preferred language for on-screen displays. HDD English: Recording Initializes the HDD. Normally it is not required to initialize the HDD. However when the HDD does not function correctly, initializing the HDD may solve the situation. If you initialize the HDD, all titles and library information stored in the HDD are permanently deleted. To view on-screen display in English. French: To view on-screen display in French. Time & Date setting e.g. HDD Format 1) Press clock. Entire disc contents including library will be erased if disc is formatted. Proceed? Start / Cancel 0% Format / To select “Year”, “Date”, “Time”, or “am/pm”. If you want to cancel the initializing, select “Cancel”. / ) buttons: To change the date. ( / buttons can also be used in addition to ADJUST ( / ) buttons.) 2) After setting all the items, press ENTER. 3) Press / ENTER. Library Initialization of the HDD starts. ) to set the Editing 2) Confirm the message, press / buttons to select “Start”, and then press ENTER button. / buttons: ADJUST ( 1) Press / buttons to select “Start”, then press ENTER button. and ADJUST ( to select “Yes”, then press See Guide and Clock reset page 35. To correct the clock of the recorder. DVD Drive speed setting HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R To reduce the mechanical noise during High speed page 100 – 105). dubbing ( High speed: Set Top Box setting To control channels of a connected satellite set top box from the recorder. Usual mode. Low speed: See “C: Satellite set top box setting” ( “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). page 42, Others The dubbing speed is lowered to reduce the mechanical noise. 187 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 Function setup This option includes the TV Guide On Screen® resetting process, followed by power off of the recorder. Refer to the guidance to operate. Network Navi Note • If the clock is set with TV Guide On Screen®, this setting is not available. DVD-RAM physical format DVD-RAM Playback To set the clock manually if it is not set correctly. 187 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Function setup Customizing the function settings (Continued) Setting of picture and sound quality for recording Sound setting D/M1 D/M2 L-PCM Picture quality setting DVD HDD DVD HDD DVD HDD SP Yes Yes Yes Yes No No LP Yes Yes Yes Yes No No MN Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 188 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p171-188 188 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Before calling service personnel Output sound conversion table Error codes on the display window Recording duration Language Code List Specification RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 189 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Before calling service personnel If you experience any of the following difficulties while using this unit, check the list below before consulting your nearest Toshiba dealer. Power Playback The power is not turned on. A DVD or CD does not play. • The power cord is not connected securely. → Connect the power cord securely. • The format of the recorded data does not correspond to this recorder, or the region number is neither “1” nor “ALL”. → Check the disc. • A defective or dirty disc is inside. → Change the disc. • The HDD mode is selected. → Press DVD button. Connection to your TV There is no TV picture. • The video cable to this recorder and your TV is not connected securely. → Connect the video cable to this recorder and your TV securely. • The input select on your TV is not set property. → Select the input to which this recorder is connected. TV reception There is no picture. • The antenna cable is not connected securely. → Reconnect the antenna cable securely. The HDD does not play. • The DVD mode is selected. → Press HDD button. During playback, picture noise appears. • Picture noise may appear in the following cases. It is not a malfunction. → There is picture noise in the original recording. → Weather, reception conditions may cause noise. → The data transmission rate is set to low. → The image data processing of this recorder cannot follow dynamic movement on the screen. (High video data rate) → A physical error has occured on the DVD disc. There is poor reception. • Channel settings are not completed. → Set the channel settings. • The antenna cable is not connected securely. → Reconnect the antenna cable securely. • Antenna signal is poor. → Consult your dealer for adjustment. If an error occurs while reading data of a disc, blocknoises may be produced there. Repeated reading of this location where the error occurred (retry) can decrease the generation of block noise. However, it can also raise the possibility of unintended delays or stops of playback. In order to prevent them, the recorder limits the number of times of retry. HDMI connection There is no picture. • Your TV is connected with the recorder via some device. → Connect directly your TV with the recorder. • The HDMI cable is not connected securely. → Reconnect the HDMI cable securely. • The current HDMI output signal is not compatible with your TV’s input signal. → Press PROG/HDMI button to select the appropriate output signal. The sound cannot be heard. • “Audio out select” of “Picture/Audio settings” is not set to “HDMI-Auto”. → Set the current output sound of “Audio out select” to “HDMI-Auto”. 190 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 190 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Introduction Recording Remote control Cannot be recorded on the HDD. Library • The DVD mode is selected. → Press HDD button. • The disc space of the HDD is not sufficient. → Delete unwanted data ( page 55) or move the contents to DVD-RAM discs ( page 100). • Some causes such as power failure may set the recorder to reject the operation to protect the HDD. → Copy necessary contents recorded in the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc, and initialize the HDD. Clock The clock blinks. → Set the clock ( page 187). Network Navi TV Guide On Screen® TV program list does not appear when TV Guide is pressed. Function setup → Leave the recorder turned off overnight. →Check the connection and setup TV Guide On Screen® again. →Listings are not provided for satellite services. • If you are using a cable box: →Ensure the G-LINK® cable is connected and its IR transmitter (the G-LINK® wand) is placed correctly in front of the cable box. See page 25, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”. →Leave the cable box turned on all of the time and turn off the recorder when not in use or overnight. → Consult your service provider for more information. Others 191 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 191 Editing • The batteries in the remote control are exhausted. → Replace all the batteries in the remote control page 18, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). ( • The light emitter of the remote control is not pointed at the receptor of this recorder. → Point the emitter of the remote control at the receptor of this recorder. • The receptor of this recorder is located too far away from the remote control. → Operate the remote control within 7 meters (23 ft) from the receptor of this recorder. • There are obstacles between the remote control and this recorder. → Remove any obstacles. • The receptor is disturbed by sunlight or fluorescent light. → Change the place of this recorder or shield the light. • The remote mode is not appropriate. → Adjust the remote mode of the remote control and page 52, “INSTALLATION this recorder ( GUIDE”). Playback The remote control does not work. • The disc is protected from deleting data. → Set the write-protect tab to the opposite of page 8). “PROTECT” ( • The disc is protected by a PC or the recorder. → Disable the protection on the device which protected the disc. • The disc space is not sufficient. page 55) or prepare a → Delete unwanted data ( new disc. • The disc is not initialized. → Initialize the disc ( page 34). • The disc may contain errors. → Complete the physical format on the disc ( page 35). • The physical format on the disc is not completed. → Complete the physical format on the disc ( page 35). Recording Cannot be recorded on a DVD-RAM disc. 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Output sound conversion table Audio setting ( Bitstream Disc BITSTREAM/ PCM jack HDMI OUTPUT jack Sound format Bitstream 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit DVD48 kHz/16 bit video 48 kHz/16 bit disc* 48 kHz/16 bit Bitstream DTS Bitstream MPEG2 44.1 kHz/16 bit VIDEO CD MPEG1 Audio Linear PCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit CD Bitstream DTS Bitstream Dolby Digital HDD Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit Bitstream Dolby Digital DVD-RAM/ Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit R/RW Bitstream MPEG2 CD-R/RW MP3/WMA Dolby Digital 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit Linear 48 kHz/24 bit PCM 96 kHz/16 bit 96 kHz/20 bit 96 kHz/24 bit Disc page 180) and output in the default setting display Analog 2ch PCM BITSTREAM/ PCM jack HDMI OUTPUT jack Analog (L/R) jacks 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/24 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/24 bit — 48 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit (Noise) 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit Analog (L/R) jacks BITSTREAM/ PCM jack HDMI OUTPUT jack Bitstream 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/24 bit 48 kHz/16 bit — 96 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit — 96 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 96 kHz/24 bit — 48 kHz/16 bit Bitstream — — Bitstream 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit Bitstream (Noise) Bitstream Bitstream 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit Bitstream 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit Bitstream 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz or 32 kHz or 48 kHz / 16 bit Analog (L/R) jacks 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/24 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/24 bit — 48 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit (Noise) 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit Audio setting ( page 180) and output in the default setting display HDMI-Auto Sound format BITSTREAM/ PCM jack HDMI OUTPUT jack Dolby Digital 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit Linear 48 kHz/24 bit DVDPCM 96 kHz/16 bit video disc* 96 kHz/20 bit 96 kHz/24 bit DTS MPEG2 MPEG1 VIDEO CD Audio Linear PCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit CD DTS Dolby Digital HDD Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit Dolby Digital DVD-RAM/ Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit R/RW MPEG2 MP3/WMA CD-R/RW Analog (L/R) jacks 48 kHz/20 bit Bitstream/48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/24 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/24 bit 48 kHz/16 bit — Bitstream/— 48 kHz/16 bit Bitstream/48 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit (Noise) Bitstream 48 kHz/20 bit Bitstream/48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/20 bit Bitstream/48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit Bitstream/48 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz or 32 kHz or 48 kHz / 16 bit • “DVD video disc” above does not include DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder. • Do not select a connection or setting indicated as “Noise” in the above list. * “HDMI-Auto” can output bitstream signals from the BISTREAM/PCM jack and the HDMI OUTPUT jack only when the connected device is equipped with bitstream decoder. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of DTS, Inc. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 192 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 192 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Error codes on the display window Error code Description ERR-01 Error detected in the physical format. ERR-10 Exceeded volume detected. ERR-11 Exceeded number of titles detected. ERR-12 Exceeded number of chapters detected. ERR-13 Copy protection information detected. ERR-14 DVD disc access error detected. ERR-15 Other errors detected. ERR-16 HDD access error detected. ERR-17 Wide image recorded at 1.4 Mbps detected. ERR-18 Different aspects detected in the same part. ERR-19 Different resolutions detected in the same part. ERR-1A Different sound quality modes detected in the same part. ERR-1B Invalid control information detected. ERR-1C Parts created in other recorder. ERR-1D Parts created with “DVD compatible mode = Off” detected. ERR-1E Invalid parts detected. ERR-1F Unexpected error detected. ERR-2E Menu encode error detected. • When creating a DVD-Video ERR-2F Overflow of the menu size detected. • When recording on DVD-R/RW ERR-30 Exceeded maximum number of menus detected. • When dubbing to DVD-R/RW ERR-31 Recovery writing executed from compatibility of drive and disc. ERR-32 Incompatibility of disc format detected. ERR-33 Disc protected. ERR-34 Disc protected or system control data error detected. ERR-35 Exceeded volume in disc budget calculation detected. ERR-36 Recording failed. (Title not saved.) ERR-37 Recording failed. (Title saved.) ERR-38 Writing failed. (Title not reserved) ERR-39 Writing failed. (Title saved.) ERR-3A Unexpected error detected. ERR-3B HDMI connection errors detected. Introduction The recorder display shows error codes in addition to the message screen. Main examples are as follows. The “**” in the “ERR - **” message indicates an error code. To delete this display, press DISPLAY button on the remote control. • When creating a DVD-Video Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi • When recording on DVD-R/RW Function setup • When using HDMI ERR-3C ERR-3D ER-7000 Possible error detected in the HDD. ER-000C Turning on the power failed. ER-FAN An irregular stop of the ventilation fan detected. Others ERR-3E Note • If you find an error code other than listed above, consult your nearest TOSHIBA dealer. 193 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 193 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Recording duration Sound rate Picture quality rate 1.0 1.4 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 6.0 6.2 6.4 6.6 6.8 7.0 7.2 7.4 7.6 7.8 8.0 8.2 8.4 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.2 DD1 (192kHz) HDD DVD-RAM DD2 (384kHz) HDD DVD-RAM HDD L-PCM DVD-RAM Remarks Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute 445 337 241 222 205 191 179 168 158 149 142 135 129 123 118 113 108 104 100 97 93 90 88 85 82 80 78 75 73 71 70 68 66 65 63 62 60 59 58 56 18 38 14 43 29 06 13 35 59 17 19 01 16 01 11 44 38 49 16 58 53 00 17 44 20 04 55 53 58 09 25 46 11 41 15 53 34 19 08 06 04 04 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 04 06 21 00 42 26 13 01 51 41 33 25 18 12 06 01 56 52 48 44 40 37 34 31 28 25 23 20 18 16 14 12 10 09 07 05 04 03 01 386 301 222 206 192 179 168 158 150 142 135 129 123 118 113 108 104 100 97 94 91 88 85 82 80 78 76 73 72 70 68 66 65 63 62 60 59 58 57 14 59 57 20 01 34 38 57 19 34 35 15 29 13 22 55 47 58 25 06 00 06 23 50 25 09 00 58 03 13 29 49 15 45 18 56 37 22 09 06 05 04 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 59 27 01 43 27 13 02 51 42 33 25 19 12 07 01 56 52 48 44 40 37 34 31 28 25 23 20 18 16 14 12 10 09 07 06 04 03 01 00 214 185 152 144 137 130 124 119 114 109 105 101 98 94 91 88 86 83 80 78 76 74 72 70 68 67 65 64 62 61 59 58 57 09 28 18 21 12 43 49 26 30 57 45 51 14 52 44 47 01 26 59 41 30 27 30 39 53 13 37 06 39 15 56 40 26 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 51 20 44 35 27 20 14 08 02 57 53 49 45 41 38 34 31 29 26 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 09 07 06 04 03 02 00 Picture quality rate for LP with D/M2. Picture quality rate for LP with D/M1. Picture quality rate for SP with D/M2. Picture quality rate for SP with D/M1. Manual maximum setting for L-PCM. Maximum value for the manual mode. • The recording durations listed above are for reference purposes only and are not guaranteed. Recording durations may vary. • The recording durations for DVD-RAM discs listed above are applicable to DVD-RAM discs that have been initialized. Actual recording duration may vary depending on the disc used. • If you subtract the actual recording duration from the duration listed in this table, the calculated time period does not represent the remaining time. • The consumption of space may vary depending on the picture and sound conditions of the recorded content. • Use the remaining disc space display feature to see the remaining space in the HDD and a DVD-RAM disc. • One continuous recording cannot exceed in any case 9 hours. • The number of titles cannot exceed 99 for a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc or 396 for the HDD. If the number of recorded titles reaches these limits, you cannot record even if there is a residual quantity. For D /M1 and D /M2, the digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used. D /M1) records in Dolby Digital at 192 kbps, and Setting 2 ( D /M2) records at 384 kbps. Setting 1 ( 194 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 194 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Language Code List Introduction Table of languages and their abbreviations Abbreviation 195 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 195 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Others Portuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Kirundi Rumanian Russian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sango Serbo-Croatian Singhalese Slovak Slovenian Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Siswati Sesotho Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Setswana Tongan Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapük Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Zulu Function setup PT QU RM RN RO RU RW SA SD SG SH SI SK SL SM SN SO SQ SR SS ST SU SV SW TA TE TG TH TI TK TL TN TO TR TS TT TW UK UR UZ VI VO WO XH YO ZU Network Navi Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Hebrew Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laotian Lithuanian Latvian, Lettish Malagasy Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Norwegian Occitan (Afan) Oromo Oriya Panjabi Polish Pashto, Pushto Language Library GN GU HA HI HR HU HY IA IE IK IN IS IW JI JW KA KK KL KM KN KS KU KY LA LN LO LT LV MG MI MK ML MN MO MR MT MY NA NE NO OC OM OR PA PL PS Abbreviation Editing No alternate language Chinese Dutch English French German Italian Japanese Korean Malay Spanish Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Amharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Belorussian Bulgarian Bihari Bislama Bengali, Bangla Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish Bhutani Greek Esperanto Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji Faroese Frisian Irish Scottish Gaelic Galician Language Playback CHI (ZH) DUT (NL) ENG (EN) FRE (FR) GER (DE) ITA (IT) JPN (JA) KOR (KO) MAY (MS) SPA (ES) AA AB AF AM AR AS AY AZ BA BE BG BH BI BN BO BR CA CO CS CY DA DZ EL EO ET EU FA FI FJ FO FY GA GD GL Abbreviation Recording ––– Language Others Specification ■ Power requirement during operation 33.0W ■ Power requirement at standby 17.2W (Front panel display: on) 15.1W (Front panel display: off) ■ Power supply ■ COMPONENT output (Y, PB, PR) Y output (green), 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative, Pin jack x 1 system PB, PR output (blue, red), 0.7Vp-p (75Ω), Pin jack x 1 system each ■ AUDIO input 2.0V (rms), 22kΩ or above, pin jack (L, R) x 3 systems 2 at rear, 1 in front 120V AC, 60 Hz ■ Mass ■ AUDIO output 5.8kg ■ External dimension Width 434 x Height 81 x Depth 339mm ■ Incoming channels TV: 2-69CH, Cable:1-125CH ■ Antenna input/output terminal VHF/UHF: 75Ω, F Connector ■ Signal system Standard NTSC Color TV system ■ Laser 2.0V (rms), 2.2kΩ or below, pin jack (L, R) x 1 systems 1 at rear ■ DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT BITSTREAM/PCM (OPTICAL terminal) Optical connector x 1 system ■ G-LINK jack This is for connection of the supplied G-LINK® cable only. ■ HDMI output Semiconductor laser, Wavelength: 650nm/780nm ■ Format This is for connection of an HDMI cable. ■ DV input DVD-Video format 4-pin x 1 in front ■ Image recording system MPEG2 ■ LAN port 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T x 1 ■ Sound recording system Dolby Digital M1, M2, Linear PCM ■ Internal hard disc ■ Remote control Wireless remote control (SE-R0199) ■ Operating conditions 250 GB Temperature: 41°F ~ 95°F (5°C ~ 35°C), Position: Horizontal ■ VIDEO input 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative, Pin jack x 3 systems, 2 at rear, 1 in front ■ VIDEO output ■ Clock display 12 hour digital display ■ Clock accuracy 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative, Pin jack x 1 system, 1 at rear Quartz (monthly deviation: approximately ±30 seconds) ■ S-VIDEO input (Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative, Mini DIN4 Pin x 3 systems (C) 0.286Vp-p (75Ω), 2 at rear, 1 in front ■ S-VIDEO output (Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative, Mini DIN4 Pin x 2 systems (C) 0.286Vp-p (75Ω), 1 at rear • Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice. • This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future. • The Illustrations and screens described in this manual may be exaggerated or simplified for easy recognition and may be slightly different from the actual unit. • This model complies with the above specifications. 196 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 196 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Memo Introduction Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others 197 06.3.20, 4:16 PM 197 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 Memo 198 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199 198 06.3.20, 4:16 PM Memo Introduction Recording Playback Editing Library Network Navi Function setup Others 199 06.3.20, 4:16 PM 199 RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p189-199
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Create Date : 2006:03:20 16:21:05Z Modify Date : 2006:03:23 10:05:35+09:00 Page Count : 199 Has XFA : No Creation Date : 2006:03:20 16:21:05Z Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Macintosh Author : …A…−…J…‘…A…i…x…‰ Mod Date : 2006:03:23 10:05:35+09:00 Metadata Date : 2006:03:23 10:05:35+09:00 Creator : …A…−…J…‘…A…i…x…‰ Title : RD-XS55SU_Ope_E_p002-011EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools